I&c TJ1600

TJ1600 Product Family
Installation and Commissioning Guide
Version: 5.0
Issue Date: 11-Mar-2024
www.tejasnetworks.com
Copyright Notice
Copyright © Tejas Networks Ltd. All rights reserved. No part of this book or manual may be
reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including
photocopying, recording, or by any information storage and retrieval system, without the express
written permission from Tejas Networks Ltd.
Warning and Disclaimer
This document is a guide for using Tejas Networks products. While every effort has been made to
make this document as complete and as accurate as possible, Tejas Networks does not accept any
responsibility for poorly designed or malfunctioning networks. The guide contains Tejas Networks
proprietary and confidential information and may not be disclosed, used, or copied without the prior
written consent of Tejas Networks or set forth in the applicable license agreement. The information
provided in this document is on an "as is" basis and is subject to change without prior notice. The
author, Tejas Networks, shall have neither liability nor responsibility to any person or entity with
respect to any loss or damage arising from the information contained in this document or from the
use of equipment or software that might accompany it. The opinions expressed in this document are
not necessarily those of Tejas Networks. The users are solely responsible for the proper use of the
software and the application of the results obtained. TEJAS NETWORKS MAKES NO WARRANTY
OR REPRESENTATION, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THIS
DOCUMENTATION, ITS QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Trademark Acknowledgments
All terms mentioned in this book that are known trademarks or service marks have been
appropriately capitalized. All trademarks duly acknowledged. Tejas Networks cannot attest to the
accuracy of third-party information. Use of a term in this document should not be regarded as
affecting the validity of any trademark or service mark.
Technical Support Information
Tejas customers can contact Tejas Support Center (TSC) 24x7x365 for any assistance through
helpline, fax or email.
- Phone(s): +91 80 41719090
- Fax: +91 80 26591079
- Email: support@india.tejasnetworks.com
- Skype: tscsupport123
- Web: www.tejasnetworks.com
Additional Learning Resources
The help content for all our products including this content is available online at https://
tejdocs.india.tejasnetworks.com/. Please contact our Sales team to get access to this content or to
organize any onsite and/or offsite trainings related to our products or technologies.
Feedback
Your opinion is of great value and will help us improve the quality of our documentation and related
learning resources. Drop a Note to docs@tejasnetworks.com and let us know how we can assist you
in your learning.
Revision history
Version Document ID and Updates

issue date
4.0 170-DOC000199-E Test procedure added
11-Mar-2024 • Test HCPSLine29 card
• Test MDU-2x16CL-C, ROADM-8-C, and ROADM-
9-C cards
Added Graphical presentation of cards - dimensions
of all TJ1600C cards dimension
Updated
• Card population rule
• Added OTUC1/OTUC2 Connection- HCPSLine29
Card for TJ1600-11/6/2
3.1 170-DOC000196-E • Formula to get the daughter card and further sub
26-Jun-2023 slot number information added before Slot
number details table.
3.0 170-DOC000196-E • No updates in the current release.
30-Dec-2022
3.0 170-DOC000195-E • Updated card population rule
11-Nov-2022 • Updated install the optical adapter card topic
• Added topics for connecting OTDR and OTDRF,
and 1625 coupling WDM ports
• Added test procedure for OTDR, OTDRF, and
1625 coupling WDM cards
2.1 170-DOC000192-E • Updated card population rule
13-June-2022 • Added HCPSLine33 and HCPSLine34 card
configuration details
• TJ1600-11: Updated information and image on
HCPSLine33 and HCPSLine34 for OTU2/OTU2e
ports, OTU4 port
ports, OTU4 port
ports, OTU4 port
• Added test procedure for HCPSLine33,
HCPSLine34
Version Document ID and Updates
issue date
2.0 170-DOC000188-E • Updated Card parameter details Note
25-Mar-2022 • Added HCPSLine31 and HCPSLine32 card
configuration details
• Added Bonding Properties information in
Connect grounding
ports, OTU4 port
ports, OTU4 port
ports, OTU4 port
• Added test procedure for HCPSLine31,
HCPSLine32, and MDU-64-D card
• Updated PFU08 and PFU07 power connector
• Updated PFU08 and PFU07 power cable
1.0 170-DOC000180-E Standard Release
30-Jun-2021
Table of Contents
Document overview 1
Content organization .............................................................................. 1
Additional resources ............................................................................... 3
Target audience..................................................................................... 3
Safety guidelines 5
Safety recommendations ........................................................................ 5
General safety guidelines ......................................................................... 5
Maintain safety with electricity.................................................................. 5
Prevent electrostatic discharge damage ..................................................... 6
General site requirements ....................................................................... 6
Site environment .................................................................................... 6
Preventive site configuration .................................................................... 6
Thermal considerations............................................................................ 7
Guidelines for populating pluggable in chassis............................................. 8
Equipment racks configuration.................................................................. 10
Power supply considerations..................................................................... 10
Power filter unit (PFU) ............................................................................ 11
Dissipate static electricity........................................................................ 12
Prevent damage to pluggable module ....................................................... 13
Product operating temperature specification .............................................. 14
Optical fibers ......................................................................................... 14
Handle optical fibers................................................................................ 14
Splice optical fibers ................................................................................. 15
Repair optical fibers ................................................................................ 15
Installation, commissioning, and testing process 17
Overview .............................................................................................. 17
Installation procedure............................................................................. 18
Commissioning procedure ....................................................................... 18
Testing procedure .................................................................................. 18
Receive and unpack the node 20
Receive and unpack process .................................................................... 20
Verify shipment ..................................................................................... 20
Handle packages.................................................................................... 21
Store packages...................................................................................... 21
Unpack the node.................................................................................... 21
Slot distribution 27
Slot allotment........................................................................................ 27
Using the filler panels ............................................................................. 30
Slot distribution ..................................................................................... 31
Card population rule 32
Install TJ1600 node 36
Pre-installation checks ............................................................................ 36
Pre-installation guidelines ........................................................................ 36
Site preparation..................................................................................... 36
Preferred rack size ................................................................................. 37
Install TJ1600-11 chassis in a rack ........................................................... 38
Install TJ1600-6 chassis in a rack ............................................................ 45
Install TJ1600-2 chassis in a rack ............................................................. 50
Connect grounding or Earth cable............................................................ 57
Connect the power cables ...................................................................... 61
HCPPFU02 ............................................................................................. 62
PFU4 ..................................................................................................... 63
PFU....................................................................................................... 65
Connect ports on HCPOAM01 card 68
Alarm connection ................................................................................... 68
ESI connection ...................................................................................... 70
Craft connection .................................................................................... 71
M1/F1 connection .................................................................................. 74
LAN connection...................................................................................... 75
MGN cable connection ............................................................................ 77
Connect ports on HCPOAM03 card 80
Alarm ports connection ........................................................................... 80
LNMS/NMS1/NMS2 cable connection......................................................... 81
Craft cable connection ............................................................................ 82
Connect ports on OAMC card 84
Alarm ports connection ........................................................................... 84
NMS port connection .............................................................................. 85
LCT port connection ............................................................................... 86
OSC ports connection ............................................................................. 87
Connect optical ports on cards 90
TJ1600-11 ............................................................................................ 90
Connect STM-1 ports............................................................................... 90
Connect STM-16 ports ............................................................................. 96
Connect OTU1 ports ................................................................................ 110
Connect OTU1f ports ............................................................................... 111
Connect OTU2/OTU2e ports ..................................................................... 112
Connect OTUC1/OTUC2 ports ................................................................... 121
TJ1600-6 .............................................................................................. 136
TJ1600-2 .............................................................................................. 171
Connect Ethernet ports on cards 196
Connect ports on CEF-5 card ................................................................... 196
TJ1600-11 ............................................................................................. 196
TJ1600-6 ............................................................................................... 199
Connect Ethernet ports on optical tributary cards ....................................... 204
TJ1600-11 ............................................................................................. 204
TJ1600-6 ............................................................................................... 220
TJ1600-2 ............................................................................................... 233
Connect fiber channel ports on cards 244
TJ1600-11 ............................................................................................ 244
Connect 8GFC/12GFC ports ...................................................................... 244
Connect 16GFC ports .............................................................................. 250
TJ1600-6 .............................................................................................. 256
Connect 1GFC/2GFC/4GFC ports ............................................................... 256
TJ1600-2 .............................................................................................. 269
Connect 1GFC/2GFC/4GFC ports ............................................................... 269
Connect ports on DWDM cards 278
Install standalone units........................................................................... 278
Install the optical adapter card ................................................................ 279
Connect ports on OFA card ..................................................................... 281
Connect high power OFA ports ................................................................. 282
Connect MDU8-D ports ........................................................................... 283
Connect MDU16-D ports ......................................................................... 284
Connect MDU40 ports ............................................................................. 285
Connect CLMDU ports ............................................................................. 287
Connect MDU96 ports ............................................................................. 287
Connect OADM ports .............................................................................. 289
Connect ROADM ports ............................................................................ 290
........................................................................................................... Con-
nect OPM ports........................................................................................... 291
Connect optical PSCM ports .................................................................... 292
Connect OFM unit .................................................................................. 294
Connecting VOA ports............................................................................. 295
Connect ports on (FPU01/FPU02) card ...................................................... 296
Connect OSCF ports .............................................................................. 297
Connecting DCM ports ............................................................................ 299
Connecting OTDR ports........................................................................... 300
Connecting OTDRF ports ......................................................................... 303
Connecting 1625 coupling WDM ports ....................................................... 306
Connecting C+L coupler CLF-S and CLF-D ................................................. 307
Commission the node 310
Configure parameters in SLAT page.......................................................... 310
Connect PC to LAN/NMS port of the node .................................................. 314
Connect PC to LNMS ports of the node ...................................................... 314
Download software from SLAT page ......................................................... 315
Log into an uncommissioned node ............................................................ 316
Set node date and time .......................................................................... 317
Verify the serial numbers of cards and pluggable modules of the node .......... 318
Set node date and time .......................................................................... 318
Synchronization reference clock source for the node ................................... 319
Backup and restore node configuration data .............................................. 319
General configuration 322
Switch ON node and PC configuration ....................................................... 322
Login to the system................................................................................ 322
Configure OSPF parameters..................................................................... 323
Configuring VCG Ports ............................................................................ 323
Add new VC To VCG ............................................................................... 325
Configure STM port ................................................................................ 326
Configure Ethernet interfaces .................................................................. 332
Configure timing manager ....................................................................... 332
Check alarms ........................................................................................ 333
Multi shelf configuration 335
Physical connectivity .............................................................................. 335
Configure subtended shelf from SLAT page................................................ 336
System test procedures 338
Testing HCPULine01 Card........................................................................ 338
Before you start ..................................................................................... 338
Procedure for testing STM-1/4/16 interfaces............................................... 338
Procedure for testing GIGE interfaces of HCPULine01 in EoS mode ................ 340
Testing HCPSLine01 Card ........................................................................ 343
Before you start ..................................................................................... 343
Procedure for testing STM-64 interfaces..................................................... 343
Procedure for testing in EoS mode ............................................................ 344
Test HCPSLine03 card............................................................................. 345
Before you start ..................................................................................... 345
Procedure for testing in SDH GATEWAY card mode ...................................... 346
Testing Procedure in OTN FlexiCard Mode................................................... 348
Testing Procedure in IntraCard transponder mode ....................................... 349
Before you start ..................................................................................... 351
Procedure for Testing in SDH Gateway card mode ....................................... 351
Procedure for Testing in OTN FlexiCard mode ............................................. 353
Procedure for testing HCPSLine08 interfaces in Intra Card MUXPONDER mode 356
Procedure for testing in Muxponder mode .................................................. 360
Procedure for testing in Flexi 100G plus 10x10G to 1x OTU4 ......................... 363
Procedure for testing in Flexi 2x40G plus 10x10G to 1x OTU4 ....................... 366
Testing HCPSLine20 Card ........................................................................ 369
Before you start ..................................................................................... 369
Procedure for testing STM-16 Interfaces in SDH only mode .......................... 370
Before you start ..................................................................................... 373
Procedure for testing 10x10G 1x100G tributary and cross-connect ................ 373
Procedure for testing 10x10G flexi tributary and cross-connect ..................... 375
Procedure for testing in MUXPONDER mode ................................................ 377
Procedure for testing HCPSLine22 in TRANSPONDER mode ........................... 379
Procedure for testing STM-64 interfaces in 10x10G SDH Flexi Mode ............... 380
Procedure for Testing HCPSLine22 in 10x10G OTN and 1x100G OTN .............. 382
Procedure for testing HCPSLine24 in Transponder Mode ............................... 385
Before you start ..................................................................................... 386
Procedure for testing in TRANSPONDER mode............................................. 387
Before you start ..................................................................................... 389
Procedure for testing in Muxponder mode .................................................. 390
Before you start ..................................................................................... 393
Procedure for testing in 2xFlexi 100G to 2xOTU4......................................... 394
Procedure to test Line27 in 10X10G to OTU4 + flexi 100G to OTU4................ 395
Procedure for testing 2x100G TRANSPONDER OTU4 NP mode ....................... 398
Points to remember ................................................................................ 400
Procedure for testing 100G or 200G regenerator OTUC1/OTUC2 .................... 401
Procedure for testing 100G ports on HCPSLine31 ........................................ 403
Procedure for testing 10G ports on HCPSLine31 .......................................... 405
Procedure for testing 10G ports on HCPSLine33 .......................................... 413
Before you start ..................................................................................... 416
Test CEF-5 card ..................................................................................... 418
Procedure for testing CEF-5 card interfaces in L2 mode ................................ 418
Test OFA card........................................................................................ 420
Before you start ..................................................................................... 420
Testing procedure ................................................................................... 421
Test OPM card ....................................................................................... 421
Before you start ..................................................................................... 421
Test Variable Optical Attenuator (VOA) card .............................................. 423
Before you start ..................................................................................... 423
Testing Procedure ................................................................................... 424
Test OADM card..................................................................................... 424
Before you start ..................................................................................... 424
Test MDU-16CL-C-50G and ROADM-4-C-50G cards..................................... 426
Before you start ..................................................................................... 426
Test MDU-2x16CL-C, ROADM-8-C, and ROADM-9-C cards............................ 428
Before you start ..................................................................................... 428
Test MDU-40E-C-100G, MDU-40O-C-100G and ILU-C-50G cards .................. 431
Before you start ..................................................................................... 431
Test MDU-96-C-50G card ........................................................................ 434
Before you start ..................................................................................... 434
........................................................................................................... Test
MDU8-D card ............................................................................................. 436
Before you start ..................................................................................... 436
Test MDU-16-D card............................................................................... 438
Before you start ..................................................................................... 438
Test MDU-64-D card............................................................................... 440
Before you start ..................................................................................... 440
Test PSCM ............................................................................................ 441
Before you start ..................................................................................... 441
Test FPU01/FPU02 card .......................................................................... 443
Before you start ..................................................................................... 443
Test OTDR and OTDR filter card ............................................................... 445
Before you start ..................................................................................... 445
Record data and test results 447
Site verification checklist......................................................................... 447
Commission and test report..................................................................... 450
Receiver sensitivity measurement for STM-1.............................................. 450
Receiver sensitivity measurement for STM-4.............................................. 450
Receiver sensitivity measurement for STM-16 ............................................ 451
Receiver sensitivity measurement for STM-64/10G ..................................... 451
Receiver sensitivity measurement for 1G................................................... 452
Receiver sensitivity measurement for 10G ................................................. 452
Protection switching on fiber breaks, STM LOS ........................................... 453
General procedures 455
Guidelines for cleaning optical fiber connectors .......................................... 455
Inspect fiber connectors.......................................................................... 456
Clean optical fiber connectors .................................................................. 457
Clean with lint-free wipes......................................................................... 457
Clean connectors with swabs .................................................................... 458
Clean with dry compressed air .................................................................. 458
........................................................................................................... Insert
and eject the PFU ....................................................................................... 458
Insert and eject the FTU ......................................................................... 463
Insert and eject cards............................................................................. 472
Cards with ejectors ................................................................................. 473
Cards with latch handles .......................................................................... 480
Insert and eject the adapter card ............................................................. 484
Insert and eject pluggable modules .......................................................... 488
Insert and eject SFP/SFP+/XFP modules .................................................... 489
Insert and eject CFP modules ................................................................... 493
Extension power cord gauge calculation .................................................... 495
Handle microSD disk .............................................................................. 498
Guidelines to route the cables 501
Separate the power and data cables ......................................................... 501
Retain the excess cable .......................................................................... 501
Protect the cables .................................................................................. 502
Route the fiber optic cables ..................................................................... 502
Route the network cables ........................................................................ 502
Facilitate filter removal ........................................................................... 503
Avoid thermal issues while routing cables .................................................. 503
Cable bend-radius restrictions.................................................................. 504
Connector pin assignment 505
PFU08 power connector .......................................................................... 505
HCPPFU07 power connector..................................................................... 505
HCPPFU02 power connector..................................................................... 505
PFU4 power connector ............................................................................ 506
Alarm input connector ............................................................................ 506
Alarm output connector .......................................................................... 507
LNMS/NMS1/NMS2 connector .................................................................. 507
ESI connector........................................................................................ 508
NMS connector ...................................................................................... 508
LCT connector ....................................................................................... 509
LAN/MGN connector ............................................................................... 509
M1/F1 connector .................................................................................... 510
Craft connector...................................................................................... 510
Cable color codes 511
PFU08 power cable................................................................................. 511
HCPPFU07 power cable ........................................................................... 511
HCPPFU02 power cable ........................................................................... 511
PFU4 power cable .................................................................................. 511
Alarm-in cable ....................................................................................... 512
Alarm-out cable ..................................................................................... 512
ESI cable .............................................................................................. 512
M1/F1 cable .......................................................................................... 513
LAN/MGN cable...................................................................................... 513
LCT cable.............................................................................................. 514
Craft cable ............................................................................................ 514
LNMS/NMS1/NMS2 cable......................................................................... 514
Graphical presentation of cards - dimensions 517
Appendix 529
Regulatory standards compliance ............................................................ 529
List of Figures
Figure 1: Spacing and airflow recommendation for stacked systems ....................... 8
Figure 2: Population rule- Case 1 ....................................................................... 9
Figure 3: Population rule- Case 2 ....................................................................... 9
Figure 4: Population rule- Case 3 ...................................................................... 10
Figure 5: Installation, commissioning, and testing process flow .............................. 17
Figure 6: Receiving and unpacking process ......................................................... 20
Figure 7: Packing label ..................................................................................... 22
Figure 8: Straps on the packing box ................................................................... 22
Figure 9: Reinforced packing tape ...................................................................... 23
Figure 10: Removing the equipment from box ..................................................... 24
Figure 11: Removing the cushion ....................................................................... 25
Figure 12: Node covered with anti-static bag ....................................................... 26
Figure 13: TJ1600 Type-11SR: slot allotment ...................................................... 28
Figure 14: TJ1600 Type-6SR: slot allotment ........................................................ 29
Figure 15: TJ1600 Type-2SR: slot allotment ........................................................ 30
Figure 16: Attaching cage nut on rack post ......................................................... 38
Figure 17: Installing TJ1600 POTP chassis in a rack .............................................. 39
Figure 18: Install TJ1600 baffle on the rack......................................................... 40
Figure 19: Reverse mount the mount angle ......................................................... 41
Figure 20: Install enclosure assemble on the baffle .............................................. 42
Figure 21: Final TJ1600 Type-11SR node with baffle............................................. 43
Figure 22: Final TJ1600 Type-11SR node with baffle (Front view) ........................... 44
Figure 23: Final TJ1600 Type-11SR node with baffle (side view)............................. 44
Figure 25: Installing TJ1600 Type-6SR chassis in a rack........................................ 47
Figure 26: Baffle in horizontal orientation for 23" rack .......................................... 48
Figure 27: Install horizontal support brackets on the rack ..................................... 49
Figure 28: Install the baffle on the rack .............................................................. 49
Figure 29: Baffle in vertical orientation for 19"/21" rack ........................................ 50
Figure 31: Installing chassis onto the rack .......................................................... 52
Figure 32: Assemble the baffle on the rack.......................................................... 53
Figure 33: Insert the chassis inside the baffle ...................................................... 54
Figure 34: Horizontal orientation for 23" rack ...................................................... 54
Figure 35: Install horizontal support brackets on the rack ..................................... 55
Figure 36: Assemble the baffle on the rack.......................................................... 56
Figure 37: Vertical orientation for 19"/21" rack .................................................... 57
Figure 38: Safety earth terminal on TJ1600 Type-2SR chassis ............................... 59
Figure 39: Safety earth terminal on TJ1600 Type-6SR chassis ............................... 59
Figure 40: Safety earth terminal on TJ1600 Type-11SR ........................................ 60
Figure 41: Bonding topologies ........................................................................... 61
Figure 42: Connecting PFU (HCPPFU02 Card)....................................................... 63
Figure 43: Power cable connection- HCPPFU4 ...................................................... 65
Figure 44: Power supply interface on PFU of TJ1600 Type-2SR system.................... 66
Figure 45: Alarm-Out and Alarm-In ports connection (HCPOAM01 Card).................. 69
Figure 46: ESI port connection (HCPOAM01 Card) ................................................ 71
Figure 47: Craft port connection (HCPOAM01 Card) .............................................. 73
Figure 48: M1/F1 connection (HCPOAM01 Card)................................................... 75
Figure 49: LAN port connection (HCPOAM01 Card) ............................................... 77
Figure 50: MGN port connection (HCPOAM01 Card) .............................................. 79
Figure 51: Connecting HCPOAM03 card interfaces- Alarm-In.................................. 81
11
Figure 52: Connecting HCPOAM03 card interfaces- LNMS, NMS1, and NMS2 ............ 82
Figure 53: Connecting HCPOAM03 card interfaces- Craft ....................................... 83
Figure 54: ALARM IN and ALARM OUT ports- OAMC card ....................................... 85
Figure 55: NMS port- OAMC card ....................................................................... 86
Figure 56: LCT Port- OAMC Card ........................................................................ 87
Figure 57: OSC ports- OAMC Card...................................................................... 88
Figure 58: STM-1 Connection (HCPULine01 Card)................................................. 91
Figure 59: STM-1 Connection (HCPSLine08 Card)................................................. 92
Figure 60: STM-1 Connections (HCPSLine20 Card) ............................................... 93
Figure 61: STM-4 Connection (HCPULine01 Card)................................................. 94
Figure 62: STM-4 Connection (HCPSLine08 Card)................................................. 95
Figure 63: STM-4 Connections (HCPSLine20 Card) .............................................. 96
Figure 64: STM-16 Connection (HCPULine01 Card)............................................... 97
Figure 65: STM-16 Connection (HCPSLine08 Card) ............................................... 98
Figure 66: STM-16 connections in HCPSLine20 card (SDH Only Mode) .................... 99
Figure 67: STM-64 Connection (HCPSLine01 Card) ............................................... 101
Figure 68: STM64 Connections (HCPSLine03 Card)............................................... 102
Figure 70: STM-64/OC-192 Connections (HCPSLine12 Card).................................. 104
Figure 73: STM-64 Connection (HCPSLine25 card) ............................................... 107
Figure 74: STM-64 Connection- HCPSLine26........................................................ 107
Figure 75: STM-64 Connection- HCPSLine27 card................................................. 108
Figure 76: STM-64 Connection- HCPSLine31 Card ................................................ 109
Figure 77: STM-64 Connection- HCPSLine33 Card ................................................ 110
Figure 78: OTU1 Connection (HCPSLine08 card) .................................................. 111
Figure 79: OTU1f Connection- HCPSLine22 card................................................... 112
Figure 80: OTU2/OTU2e connection (HCPSLine03 card) ........................................ 113
Figure 81: OTU2/OTU2e Connection (HCPSLine08 Card) ....................................... 114
Figure 82: OTU2/OTU2e Connections (HCPSLine12 Card) ...................................... 115
Figure 83: OTU2/OTU2e Connections (HCPSLine22 Card) ...................................... 116
Figure 85: OTU2/OTU2e Connection- HCPSLine26 Card......................................... 118
Figure 86: OTU2/OTU2e Connection- HCPSLine27 ................................................ 119
Figure 89: OTUC1/OTUC2 Connection- HCPSLine26 Card....................................... 122
Figure 90: OTUC1/OTUC2 Connection- HCPSLine27 card ....................................... 123
Figure 91: OTUC1/OTUC2 Connection- HCPSLine29 card ....................................... 124
Figure 92: OTUC1-OTUC6 Connection- HCPSLine31 Card....................................... 125
Figure 93: OTUC1-OTUC6 Connection- HCPSLine32 Card....................................... 126
Figure 94: OTUC1-OTUC4 Connection- HCPSLine33 card ....................................... 127
Figure 95: OTUC1-OTUC4 Connection - HCPSLine34 card ...................................... 127
Figure 96: OTU4 Connection - HCPSLine12 Card .................................................. 128
Figure 97: OTU4 Connection - HCPSLine22 Card .................................................. 129
Figure 98: OTU4 Connection (HCPSLine24 Card) .................................................. 130
Figure 99: OTU4 Connection- HCPSLine27 Card ................................................... 131
Figure 100: OTU4 Connection- Line28 Card ......................................................... 132
12
Figure 105: STM-1 connection: HCPSLine08 card ................................................. 137
Figure 106: STM-1 connection- HCPSLine22 card ................................................. 137
Figure 109: STM-16 connection: HCPSLine08 card ............................................... 141
Figure 110: STM-16 connection: HCPSLine22 card ............................................... 142
Figure 111: STM-64 connection- HCPSLine03 card ............................................... 143
Figure 114: STM-64 Connection - HCPSLine25 card .............................................. 146
Figure 115: STM-64 Connection- HCPSLine26 Card .............................................. 147
Figure 118: STM-64 Connection - HCPSLine33 Card ............................................. 150
Figure 119: OTU1f Connection -HCPSLine22 card ................................................. 151
Figure 120: Connecting OTU1 ports- HCPSLine08 card .......................................... 152
Figure 121: OTU2/OTU2e connection- HCPSLine03 card ........................................ 153
Figure 122: OTU2/OTU2e connection - HCPSLine08 card ....................................... 153
Figure 125: OTU2/OTU2e Connection - HCPSLine25 card ...................................... 156
Figure 126: OTU2/OTU2e Connection- HCPSLine26 Card ....................................... 157
Figure 128: OTU2/OTU2e connection (HCPSLine31 card)....................................... 159
Figure 129: OTUC1/OTUC2 Connection - HCPSLine26 Card .................................... 160
Figure 130: OTUC1/OTUC2 Connection- HCPSLine27 Card..................................... 161
Figure 132: OTUC1-OTUC6 Connection- HCPSLine31 Card..................................... 163
Figure 136: OTU4 connection- HCPSLine12 card .................................................. 166
Figure 137: OTU4 Connection- HCPSLine22 card .................................................. 166
Figure 138: OTU4 Connection- HCPSLine24 ......................................................... 167
Figure 139: OTU4 Connection- HCPSLine27 Card ................................................. 168
Figure 143: OTU4 Connection - HCPSLine33 card ................................................. 170
Figure 144: OTU4 Connection - HCPSLine34 card ................................................. 171
Figure 145: Connecting STM-1 ports- HCPSLine08................................................ 172
Figure 149: Connecting STM-16 ports- HCPSLine08.............................................. 174
Figure 150: Connecting STM-16 ports- HCPSLine22.............................................. 174
Figure 151: STM-64 Connection (HCPSLine01 Card) ............................................. 175
Figure 152: STM64 Connections (HCPSLine03 Card) ............................................. 175
13
Figure 154: STM-64/OC-192 Connections (HCPSLine12 Card) ................................ 176
Figure 157: STM-64 Connection (HCPSLine25 card).............................................. 176
Figure 158: STM-64 Connection- HCPSLine26 ...................................................... 177
Figure 162: Connecting OTU1f ports- HCPSLine22 ................................................ 179
Figure 163: Connecting OTU1 ports- HCPSLine08 card .......................................... 180
Figure 164: OTU2/OTU2e Connection - HCPSLine03 card ...................................... 181
Figure 165: OTU2/OTU2e Connection- HCPSLine08 card ....................................... 181
Figure 166: Connecting OTU2/OTU2e ports- HCPSLine12 ..................................... 182
Figure 167: Connecting OTU2/OTU2e ports- HCPSLine22 ...................................... 182
Figure 168: OTU2/OTU2e Connection- HCPSLine25 card ....................................... 183
Figure 171: OTUC2/OTUC2e Connection- HCPSLine31 Card ................................... 184
Figure 172: OTUC2/OTUC2e Connection- HCPSLine33 Card ................................... 185
Figure 180: OTU4 Connection - HCPSLine12 Card ................................................ 191
Figure 181: Connecting OTU4 port- HCPSLine22 card ........................................... 191
Figure 183: OTU4 Connection- HCPSLine27 Card ................................................. 192
Figure 184: Connecting OTU4 ports- HCPSLine28 ................................................. 193
Figure 189: 10G connections (CEF-5 Card).......................................................... 197
Figure 190: 10G Connections (Line-31 Card) ....................................................... 198
Figure 191: 1G Ports (CEF5 Card) ...................................................................... 199
Figure 192: 10Gbps optical interfaces on CEF5 card ............................................. 201
Figure 193: 10Gbps optical interfaces on HCPSLine31 card .................................... 202
Figure 194: Connecting CEF-5 Card Interface- 1000BASE-X................................... 203
Figure 195: Connecting CEF-5 Card Interface- 10/100/1000BASE-TX...................... 204
Figure 196: 100Gbps Interface Connection- HCPSLine12 Card ............................... 206
Figure 197: 100G Connection (HCPSLine24 Card) ................................................ 207
Figure 198: 100GE Interface Connection- HCPSLine27 Card................................... 208
Figure 199: 100G connection - HCPSLine28 card.................................................. 209
Figure 200: 10G connection (HCPSLine01 Card)................................................... 210
Figure 201: 10G connection (HCPSLine03 card) ................................................... 211
14
Figure 205: 10G Connection (HCPSLine25 Card) .................................................. 215
Figure 206: 10Gbps Inteface Connection- HCPSLine26 Card .................................. 216
Figure 207: 10Gbps interface connection- HCPSLine27 Card .................................. 217
Figure 208: Connecting 1GE interface on HCPULine01 card.................................... 218
Figure 209: 1Gbpsconnections (HCPSLine08 Card) ............................................... 219
Figure 210: 40GE interface connection ............................................................... 220
Figure 214: 100G connection (HCPSLine28 card) ................................................. 223
Figure 215: 10G Connection - HCPSLine03 card ................................................... 225
Figure 216: 10G Connection - HCPSLine12 card ................................................... 226
Figure 217: 10G connection - HCPSLine22 card ................................................... 227
Figure 219: 10Gbps interface connection- HCPSLine26 card................................... 229
Figure 221: 1GE connection- HCPSLine08 card .................................................... 231
Figure 222: 1G Connection - HCPSLine22 card..................................................... 231
Figure 223: 40GE interface connection- HCPSLine27 card...................................... 233
Figure 226: 100Gbps interface connection- HCPSLine27 card ................................. 236
Figure 227: 100Gbps ports- HCPSLine28 card...................................................... 236
Figure 229: 10G connection- HCPSLine12 card .................................................... 238
Figure 230: 10G connection- HCPSLine22 card .................................................... 239
Figure 234: 1G connection- HCPSLine08 card ...................................................... 241
Figure 235: 1G connection- HCPSLine22 card ...................................................... 241
Figure 236: 40GE interface connection ............................................................... 242
Figure 237: Connecting 8GFC/12GFC ports on HCPSLine12 card............................. 245
Figure 238: Connecting 8GFC ports on HCPSLine22 card ....................................... 246
Figure 239: Connecting 12GFC ports on HCPSLine22 card ..................................... 247
Figure 249: Connecting 1GFC/2GFC ports on HCPSLine22 card .............................. 257
Figure 252: Connecting 8GFC ports on HCPSLine22 card ....................................... 260
Figure 254: Connecting 8GFC/12GFC ports HCPSLine26 card ................................. 261
15
Figure 262: Connecting 1GFC/2GFC/4GFC ports on HCPSLine22 card...................... 270
Figure 264: Connecting 8GFC/12GFC ports HCPSLine25 card ................................. 271
Figure 265: Connecting 8GFC ports on HCPSLine22 .............................................. 272
Figure 267: Connection 8GFC/12GFC ports on HCPSLine26 card............................. 273
Figure 268: Connection 8GFC/12GFC ports on HCPSLine27 card............................. 273
Figure 275: Install the cage nut on the rack post ................................................. 279
Figure 276: Installation of MDU40 unit on rack .................................................... 279
Figure 277: HCPADP01 with MDU-8 card ............................................................. 280
Figure 278: FPUADP01 with FPU01 card in 2/3rd slot of HCPADP01......................... 280
Figure 279: HCPADP02 card with OADM cards ..................................................... 280
Figure 280: Optical fiber amplifier interfaces ....................................................... 282
Figure 281: Ports and connector for OFA-C-S26-FG .............................................. 283
Figure 282: Interface connection for MDU-8-D card .............................................. 284
Figure 283: Interface connection for MDU-16-D card ............................................ 285
Figure 284: Port connectivity diagram for MDU-40E-C-100G unit............................ 286
Figure 285: Connecting interfaces- MDU-16CL-C-50G ........................................... 287
Figure 286: Interface connection on MDU-96 card ................................................ 289
Figure 287: Interface Connection- OADM-1 and OADM-4 cards .............................. 290
Figure 288: Interface connection - ROADM-4-C-50G card ...................................... 291
Figure 289: Interface connection- ROADM-8-C-50G .............................................. 291
Figure 290: Interface connection- OPM-C-4 and OPM-C-2 card............................... 292
Figure 291: Interface connection- 1x5 PSCM ....................................................... 293
Figure 292: Interface Connection- VOA card ........................................................ 296
Figure 293: Ports on FPU01 card........................................................................ 297
Figure 294: Connecting DCM interfaces............................................................... 300
Figure 295: Port connectivity diagram for DCM with OSCF ..................................... 300
Figure 296: Port connectivity of OTDR-2 card ...................................................... 301
Figure 299: Port connectivity of OTDRF-2 card..................................................... 304
Figure 302: Port connectivity of 1625 coupling WDM card...................................... 307
Figure 303: Configure slat node ......................................................................... 311
Figure 304: Initialize node parameters- TJ1600 Type-2SR ..................................... 311
Figure 305: Initialize node parameters - TJ1600-6 ............................................... 311
Figure 306: Initialize node parameters- TJ1600 Type-11SR with HCPXCC04 (640G).. 312
16
Figure 307: Initialize node parameters- TJ1600 Type-11SR with HCPXCC04 (900G).. 312
Figure 308: Initialize node parameters page of TJ1600-11 with OSMC card.............. 312
Figure 309: PC Connected to the Node ............................................................... 323
Figure 310: Multi shelf connection between main and subtended ............................ 336
Figure 311: Configure Slat page - subtended shelf ............................................... 337
Figure 312: Setup for testing STM-1/4 interfaces ................................................. 339
Figure 313: Setup for Testing HCPULine01 - GIGE Ports in EoS Mode ...................... 341
Figure 314: Setup for testing STM-64 interfaces .................................................. 344
Figure 315: Setup for testing in EoS mode .......................................................... 345
Figure 316: Setup for testing in SDH Gateway/SDH FEC mode ............................... 347
Figure 317: Setup for Testing HCPSLine03 Card in OTN FlexiCard Mode .................. 348
Figure 318: Setup for testing in IntraCard TRANS/MUXPONDER mode..................... 350
Figure 319: Setup for testing in SDH Gateway card mode ..................................... 352
Figure 320: Setup for testing in OTN Configuration............................................... 354
Figure 321: Setup for testing in Intra Card Muxponder Mode ................................. 357
Figure 322: Setup for testing HCPSLine12 card .................................................... 361
Figure 323: Setup- Flexi 100G plus 10x10G to OTU4 Muxponder ............................ 363
Figure 324: Test setup 2- Flexi 100G plus 10x10G to OTU4 Muxponder ................... 364
Figure 325: Test setup- Flexi 2x40G plus 10x10G to OTU4 Muxponder .................... 366
Figure 326: Test setup 2- Flexi 2x40G plus 10x10G to OTU4 Muxponder ................. 368
Figure 327: Test setup for Testing HCPSLine20 card ............................................. 371
Figure 328: Test Setup: 10x10G 1x100G TRUBUTARY AND CROSS-CONNECT .......... 374
Figure 329: Test setup: 10x10G FLEXI TRIBUTARY AND CROSS-CONNECT mode...... 376
Figure 330: Setup for testing HCPSLine22 in MUXPONDER mode ............................ 377
Figure 331: Setup for testing HCPSLine22 in TRANSPONDER mode......................... 379
Figure 332: Setup for Testing HCPSLine22 in SDH Flexi Mode ................................ 381
Figure 333: Setup for Testing HCPSLine22 in OTN TRIBUTARY Mode ....................... 382
Figure 334: Setup for testing HCPSLine24 in TRANSPONDER mode......................... 386
Figure 335: Test set-up for HCPSLine25 card....................................................... 388
Figure 336: Setup for testing in MUXPONDER Mode .............................................. 391
Figure 337: Test Setup- 2xFlexi 100G to 2xOTU4 Transponder............................... 394
Figure 338: Test Setup- 10x10G to OTU4 Muxponder ........................................... 396
Figure 339: Test Setup for Testing HCPSLine28 Card ............................................ 399
Figure 340: Test Setup for Testing HCPSLine29 Card ............................................ 401
Figure 341: Test set up for testing 100G ports on HCPSLine31 card ........................ 404
Figure 342: Test set up for testing 10G ports on HCPSLine31 card.......................... 406
Figure 345: Test set up for testing 10G ports on HCPSLine33 card.......................... 414
Figure 347: Setup for Testing CEF-5 Card Interfaces ............................................ 419
Figure 348: Test OPM card ................................................................................ 423
Figure 349: Testing OADM-4-D card ................................................................... 426
Figure 350: Setup for Testing MDU-16CL-C-50G and ROADM-4-C-50G cards ........... 428
Figure 351: Setup for Testing MDU-2x16CL-C and ROADM-8-C cards ...................... 430
Figure 352: Setup for Testing MDU-2x16CL-C and ROADM-9-C cards ...................... 430
Figure 353: Setup: HCPSLine03, MDU40E-D, MDU40O-D, and ILU-C-50G cards ....... 433
Figure 354: Test MDU-64-D .............................................................................. 435
Figure 355: Setup for Testing HCPSLine03 and MDU8-D cards ............................... 437
Figure 356: Setup for testing HCPSLine03 and MDU-16-D cards ............................. 439
Figure 357: Testing PSCM ................................................................................. 442
17
Figure 358: Testing FPU01 card ......................................................................... 445
Figure 359: Testing OTDR and OTDR filter cards .................................................. 446
Figure 360: Fiber intersection ............................................................................ 456
Figure 361: Position of PFU in TJ1600 Type-2SR chassis........................................ 459
Figure 362: Sliding PFU into the chassis .............................................................. 460
Figure 363: Tightening captive screws on PFU ..................................................... 461
Figure 364: Loosening captive screws on PFU ...................................................... 462
Figure 365: Sliding the PFU out from the chassis.................................................. 463
Figure 366: Position of FTU on TJ1600 Type-2SR chassis....................................... 464
Figure 367: Sliding FTU into the chassis.............................................................. 465
Figure 368: Tightening captive screw on FTU ....................................................... 465
Figure 369: Loosening captive screw on FTU ....................................................... 466
Figure 370: Sliding FTU out from the chassis ....................................................... 467
Figure 371: Position of air filter on TJ1600 Type-2SR chassis ................................. 467
Figure 372: Sliding air filter into the chassis ........................................................ 469
Figure 373: Tightening captive screw on air filter ................................................. 470
Figure 374: Loosening captive screw on air filter .................................................. 471
Figure 375: Sliding air filter from the chassis ....................................................... 472
Figure 376: Sliding the card into chassis ............................................................. 474
Figure 377: Operating ejectors inwards while inserting ......................................... 475
Figure 378: Tightening captive screws on card..................................................... 476
Figure 379: Loosening captive screws on card ..................................................... 477
Figure 380: Operating ejectors inwards .............................................................. 478
Figure 381: Sliding out the card......................................................................... 479
Figure 382: Inserting the card ........................................................................... 481
Figure 383: Tightening captive screws on the card ............................................... 482
Figure 384: Loosening captive screws on the card ................................................ 483
Figure 385: Sliding the card out of the chassis..................................................... 484
Figure 386: Installing adapter card into the chassis .............................................. 486
Figure 387: Sliding FPUADP01 adapter card into HCPADP01................................... 487
Figure 388: Sliding out the adapter card from the chassis ..................................... 488
Figure 389: SFP transceiver module with a Mylar tab latch .................................... 489
Figure 390: SFP transceiver module with an actuator button latch .......................... 490
Figure 391: SFP/SFP+/XFP transceiver module having a bail clasp latch .................. 490
Figure 392: Inserting the transceiver in to the port .............................................. 491
Figure 393: Inserting LC connector cable into the transceiver module ..................... 491
Figure 394: Ejecting pluggable module with Mylar tab........................................... 492
Figure 395: Ejecting pluggable module with actuator button .................................. 492
Figure 396: Ejecting SFP/SFP+/XFP transceiver module having a bail clasp latch ...... 493
Figure 397: Tighten the captive screw on CFP...................................................... 494
Figure 398: Inserting SC connector cable into the CFP transceiver module............... 494
Figure 399: Loosening the captive screws on CFP................................................. 495
Figure 400: Ejecting CFP module ....................................................................... 495
Figure 401: Voltage drop calculator parameters ................................................... 496
Figure 402: Gold plated terminal of microSD disk ................................................. 499
Figure 403: Technique for proper holding of disk.................................................. 499
Figure 404: Filter removal with the help of cable slack .......................................... 503
Figure 405: Cable bend-radius restrictions .......................................................... 504
Figure 406: Physical dimension of HCPSLine21 .................................................... 517
18
Physical dimension of HCPSLine25 ..................................................................... 520
19
List of Tables
Table 1: Operating temperature specification....................................................... 14
Table 2: Card population rule ............................................................................ 32
Table 3: Space occupied in the rack details for TJ1600-11 chassis with baffles ......... 37
Table 4: Space occupied in the rack details for TJ1600-6 chassis with baffles ........... 37
Table 5: Space occupied in the rack details for TJ1600-2 chassis with baffles ........... 37
Table 6: Alarm-Out severity levels ..................................................................... 70
Table 7: Alarm-Out severity levels ..................................................................... 81
Table 8: ALARM OUT severity levels ................................................................... 85
Table 9: Slot number details ............................................................................. 281
Table 10: UserID and the Password Rules ........................................................... 317
Table 11: Backup configuration parameters......................................................... 320
Table 12: Restore configuration parameters ........................................................ 321
Table 13: Provisioning VCG Parameters .............................................................. 324
Table 14: Provision interface- STM parameters .................................................... 327
Table 15: Cross connects provisioning ................................................................ 340
Table 16: VCG Association ................................................................................ 341
Table 17: Test Performance - HCPULine01 Card .................................................. 342
Table 18: Test Performance - HCPSLine01 Card ................................................... 344
Table 19: Test Performance - HCPSLine01 Card ................................................... 345
Table 20: Test performance- HCPSLine03 card..................................................... 349
Table 21: Test Performance- HCPSLine03 Card .................................................... 351
Table 22: Cross-connects Provisioning - HCPSLine08 (SDH GATEWAY Card) ............ 353
Table 24: ODU connections ............................................................................... 355
Table 26: Time slots and TPN - HCPSLine08 (Muxponder mode) ............................. 358
Table 31: Time slots and TPN - HCPSLine12 card ................................................. 365
Table 32: Test Performance- HCPSLine12 card..................................................... 366
Table 36: Test Performance - HCPSLine22 card.................................................... 375
Table 40: ODU connections - HCPSLine22 ........................................................... 384
Table 41: Test performance - HCPSLine22 card.................................................... 384
Table 48: Test performance - HCPSLine29 Card ................................................... 402
Table 49: ODUC1 connections on HCPSLine31 ..................................................... 405
Table 50: Muxponder configurations ................................................................... 407
20
Table 53: Muxponder configurations ................................................................... 415
Table 55: Test performance - CEF-5 card ............................................................ 420
Table 56: Site verification checklist .................................................................... 447
Table 57: Report details of commissioning and testing .......................................... 450
Table 58: Receiver sensitivity measurement for STM-1 ......................................... 450
Table 59: Receiver sensitivity measurement for STM-4 ......................................... 450
Table 60: Receiver sensitivity measurement for STM-16........................................ 451
Table 61: Receiver sensitivity measurement for STM-64........................................ 451
Table 62: Receiver sensitivity measurement for STM-64/10G................................. 451
Table 63: Receiver sensitivity measurements for 1G ............................................. 452
Table 64: Receiver sensitivity measurement for 10G............................................. 452
Table 65: Receiver sensitivity measurement for 100G ........................................... 452
Table 66: Synchronization tests ......................................................................... 453
Table 67: Protection switching on fiber breaks, STM LOS....................................... 453
Table 68: Receiver sensitivity measurement for 100G (DWDM) .............................. 453
Table 69: Recommended actions for conditions of fiber connectors ......................... 456
Table 70: Voltage drop calculator parameters ...................................................... 497
Table 71: Typical AWG wire sizes ....................................................................... 497
Table 72: MicroSD disk size............................................................................... 500
Table 73: PFU08 power connector ...................................................................... 505
Table 74: HCPPFU07 power connector ................................................................ 505
Table 75: HCPPFU02 power connector ................................................................ 505
Table 76: PFU4 power connector........................................................................ 506
Table 77: Alarm input connector ........................................................................ 506
Table 78: Alarm output connector ...................................................................... 507
Table 79: LNMS connector ................................................................................ 507
Table 80: ESI connector ................................................................................... 508
Table 81: NMS connector .................................................................................. 508
Table 82: LCT connector ................................................................................... 509
Table 83: LAN/MGN connector ........................................................................... 509
Table 84: M1/F1 connector ............................................................................... 510
Table 85: Craft connector ................................................................................. 510
Table 86: PFU08 power cable ............................................................................ 511
Table 87: HCPPFU07 power cable....................................................................... 511
Table 88: HCPPFU02 power cable....................................................................... 511
Table 89: PFU4 power cable .............................................................................. 511
Table 90: Alarm-in cable................................................................................... 512
Table 91: Alarm-out cable................................................................................. 512
Table 92: ESI cable.......................................................................................... 512
Table 93: M1/F1 cable ...................................................................................... 513
Table 94: LAN/MGN cable ................................................................................. 513
Table 95: LCT cable ......................................................................................... 514
Table 96: Craft cable........................................................................................ 514
Table 97: LNMS/NMS1/NMS2 cable .................................................................... 514
Table 98: Regulatory standard compliance .......................................................... 529
21
©Tejas Networks Ltd.

22
1 Document overview
This document provides information to install the TJ1600 product family and to initially
configure it to the point of verifying its proper operation in the network.
TJ1600 product family supports the following products:
• TJ1600-2 (also referred to as TJ1600-Type-2SR)
• TJ1600-6 (also referred to as TJ1600-Type-6SR)
• TJ1600-11 (also referred to as TJ1600 Type-11SR)
1.1 Content organization

This document organization is as follows:
Chapter Scope
Safety guidelines This chapter contains safety guidelines that you must follow
for personal safety and to operate the TJ1600 node
correctly. It also describes about the site environment and
instructions to be followed during site preparation and
equipment rack configuration.
Installation, This chapter gives an overview of the installation,

commissioning, and testing commissioning, and testing process for a TJ1600 system.
process
Receive and unpack the This chapter describes the procedures to be followed during
node receiving and unpacking of a TJ1600 node. It includes
shipment verification, handling packages, and unpacking the
equipment.
Card population rule This chapter provide details regarding the card population
rule to be followed in TJ1600 system.
Install TJ1600 node This chapter describes procedures to be followed when

installing TJ1600 node. It includes preparing site for
installation, pre-installation guidelines, installing node into
the rack, connecting power cables, and grounding cables.
Connect Ethernet ports on This chapter describes the port connections on HCPOAM01
cards card supported in TJ1600 system.
Connect ports on This chapter describes the port connections on HCPOAM03

HCPOAM03 card card supported in TJ1600 system.
Connect ports on OAMC This chapter describes the port connections on OAMC card
card supported in TJ1600 system.

TJ1600 Product Family Installation and Commissioning Guide v5.0
Chapter Scope
Connect optical ports on This chapter covers the optical port connection for cards
cards supported on TJ1600 system which includes connecting
STM-n and OTU-n ports.
Connect Ethernet ports on This chapter covers the Ethernet port connection for cards
cards supported on TJ1600 system.
Connect fiber channel ports This chapter provides the fiber channel connections for cards
on cards supported on TJ1600 system.
Connect ports on DWDM This chapter covers the port connections for DWDM cards or
cards units supported on TJ1600 system.
Commission the node This chapter describes the commissioning procedures that
have to be performed on a newly installed TJ1600 system. It
includes logging into a un-commissioned node, downloading
software from SLAT page, setting node date and time, and
nominating synchronization clock reference for the node.
Multi shelf configuration This chapter covers the procedure to connect the TJ1600
systems in multi shelf configuration.
General configuration This appendix describes the general procedures for

configuring TJ1600 node. It includes switching ON the node
and PC configuration, logging into the node, configuring
optical ports, OSPF, Ethernet ports, timing manager, and
checking alarms.
System test procedures This chapter describes the system level tests that are
required to be performed on the node.
Record data and test This appendix provides various forms to record system data
results and test results during the commissioning process.
General procedures This appendix describes the procedures to be followed when

cleaning and inspecting optical and fiber connectors. It also
describes the procedure to be followed during inserting and
ejecting of cards.
Guidelines to route the This chapter describes the procedures and the guidelines to
cables route cables securely without degrading the performance,
and avoid insecure and unsafe connections.
Connector pin assignment This appendix provides connector pin details for different
cables used for connecting the interfaces on the cards.

Document overview
Chapter Scope
Cable color codes This appendix describes the color coding scheme for
different cables used.
1.2 Additional resources

For more information, refer to the following guides:
Document Name Description
TJ1600 Product Family This document describes the functions, features, capabilities
6.x Feature Description and specification of a product.
Guide
V4.0
TJ1600 Product Family This document provides information on hardware
Hardware Description configuration, functions, capabilities, limitations, and physical
Guide characteristics of the product.
V5.0
TJ1600 Product Family This document introduces and orients service providers to the
6.x User Interface Guide content, function, and organization of the user interface that
support the nodes.
V5.0
TJ1600 Product Family This document introduces and orients service providers to the
6.x L2 UI Guide content, function, and organization of the user interface
supported on the carrier Ethernet card.
V1.0
TJ1600 Product Family This document provides the list of alarms,causes, and
6.x ACP Guide
procedures to clear the alarm.
v5.0
1.3 Target Audience

This document is intended for technicians and maintenance engineers who are
responsible for the day-to-day operations of the system.

2 Safety guidelines
This chapter provides important safety guidelines for personnel safety and to operate
the equipment correctly. It also describes about the site environment and instruction to
be followed during site preparation and node rack configuration. You must read and
follow all the precautionary procedures before starting to operate the node.
2.1 Safety recommendations

This section lists the safety recommendations that need to be followed for safe operation
of the node.
2.1.1 General safety guidelines

• Keep the chassis clean and dust-free before, during, and after the installation.
• Keep the tools away from the work area so that you or others do not fall over
them.
• Avoid wearing loose clothes that could get caught in the chassis. Fasten your tie or
scarf and roll up your sleeves before handling the equipment.
• Wear safety glasses if you are working under any conditions that might be
hazardous to your eyes.
• Do not perform any action that creates a potential hazard to people or make the
equipment unsafe.
• Wear safety earmuffs or earphones if you are working in noisy conditions.
• Wear safety helmet when working at height.
2.1.2 Maintain safety with electricity

Follow the listed guidelines while working on equipment powered by electricity:
• Locate the emergency power off switch for the room in which you are working. In
case of an electrical accident, act quickly by turning off the power.
• Disconnect all power source by turning off the power and unplugging the power
cord before:
— Installing or removing a chassis.
— Working near power supplies.
• Do not work alone if potentially hazardous conditions exist.
• Never assume that power is disconnected from a circuit. Always check the circuit
to confirm.
• Look carefully for possible hazards in your work area, such as cords and missing
safety grounds. If an electrical accident occurs, proceed as follows:
— Turn off the system.
— Determine if the person needs rescue breathing or external cardiac compressions, and
then take appropriate action.

2.1.3 Prevent electrostatic discharge damage

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage equipment and impair electrical circuitry. ESD
damage occurs when electronic components are improperly handled and it can result in
complete or intermittent failure.
Follow the optimal electrostatic discharge protection:
• Always follow ESD-prevention when removing and replacing components.
• Ensure that the chassis is electrically connected to earth ground.
• Wear an ESD-preventive wrist strap, ensuring that it makes good skin contact.
• Connect the grounding clip to an unpainted surface of the chassis frame to safely
ground ESD voltages.
• The wrist strap and cord must operate effectively to properly guard against ESD
damage and shocks. If no wrist strap is available, ground yourself by touching the
metal part of the chassis.
• For safety, check the resistance value of the anti-static strap periodically, which
must be between 1 and 10 mega-ohms (MΩ).
2.2 General site requirements

This section describes the requirements your site must meet for safe installation and
operation of the system. Before installation, verify the site for readiness as per the Site
verification checklist.
2.2.1 Site environment

The TJ1600 node can be mounted in a rack. The location of the node, the layout of node
rack including wiring room is extremely important for proper system operation. Node
placed closer to each other, inadequate ventilation, and inaccessible panels can cause
system maintenance issue resulting in system malfunctions and shutdowns.
While planning your site layout and node locations, consider the precautions described in
the section Preventive site configuration to understand how to avoid node failures and
reduce the possibility of environmentally caused shutdowns. If you are currently
experiencing shutdowns or unusually high errors with your existing node, these
precautions may help you isolate the cause of failures and prevent potential problems.
2.2.2 Preventive site configuration

Take the following precautions to plan an acceptable operating environment for your
TJ1600 node and to avoid environmental equipment failures:
• Electrical equipment generates heat. Without adequate air circulation, the ambient
air temperature might not be adequate to cool equipment to acceptable operating
temperatures. Ensure that the room in which you operate your system has proper
ventilation.
• Damage from static discharge can cause immediate or intermittent equipment

failure. Always follow the ESD prevention procedures to avoid damage to
equipment.

Safety guidelines
• An open chassis allows air leaks, which may interrupt and redirect the flow of
cooling air from internal components. Ensure that the chassis cover is secure to
allow cooling air to flow effectively from right to left within it.
CAUTION: Proper hydraulic/pneumatic material handling equipment

must be used for mounting the equipment. If the node is heavy and the hydraulic
equipment is not available then ensure that at least two installers are at the
installation site.
2.2.3 Thermal considerations

Following are the thermal considerations recommended to be followed while installation:
1. Ensure that the inlet air temperature is within the operating limits of the system.
Operating temperature refers to the effective air temperature at the air inlet
location, which is one inch away from the chassis inlet. The operating temperature
for the equipment is specified in the section Product operating temperature
specification.
2. A minimum distance of 70mm is required at the air inlet and outlet of the system to
allow unobstructed air flow.
3. Systems inside a rack should maintain same air flow direction to avoid hot air recir-
culation between systems.
4. In an open rack, systems can be stacked one more than the other without leaving
space between the systems.
5. In case of an enclosed rack with perforated front and rear doors, systems can be
stacked one more than the other if the airflow of the systems is from front to back.
6. For systems with side to side air flow, a minimum 1RU space is left more than and
less than the system.
7. Install the system in the lower portion of the rack and a minimum of 1RU space is
left less than the lowest system in the rack.
8. Avoid locating the Tejas device in a location where the system air intake vents
might draw in the exhaust air from adjacent equipment.
9. Ensure the site is free from dust because dust tends to clog the system fans and fil-
ters resulting in reduced flow of cool air through the equipment rack and the sys-
tems. Dust accumulation leads to the risk of an over temperature condition.
10. Avoid installing the chassis on the sliders.

Note: The requirements for Installation clearance and spacing between systems for
solid-wall cabinets are not in the scope of this document.
Following figure shows the recommended spacing (minimum) and airflow for stacked
systems:
Figure 1: Spacing and airflow recommendation for stacked systems
2.2.4 Guidelines for populating pluggable in chassis

Follow the guidelines mentioned when populating pluggable in the chassis. Do the
following recommendations for an improved thermal performance:
• Always cover an empty slot with an appropriate filler panel to prevent overheating
and entry of dust into the chassis.
• Protect the pluggable modules or unused ports by inserting clean dust caps to
prevent the entry of dust and for optical safety.
• Follow the recommended order for populating pluggable in the chassis.
Recommended order of pluggable installation
The sequence for installing pluggable (Optical and electrical) depends on the
arrangement of ports in a card. The recommended sequence to install pluggable is
explained in the following with three examples.
Case 1: If a card consists of four ports, all in one row, then install the pluggable starting
from left to right, in an alternate port sequence: port P1 > P3 > P2 > P4.

Safety guidelines
Figure 2: Population rule- Case 1
Case 2: If a card consists of four ports, 2 ports each in one row, then install the
pluggable diagonally as shown in the following figure:
Case 3: If a card consists of eight ports, 4 ports each in one row, then install the
pluggable in first row (top) in an alternate sequence followed by second row (bottom) in
an alternate sequence, ensuring that the sequence is non-overlapping in the two rows as
shown in the following figure. Install the pluggable for the remaining empty ports in the
same order.

2.2.5 Equipment racks configuration

While planning an acceptable equipment rack configuration, make sure of the following:
• The enclosed racks have adequate ventilation and are not overlay congested.
Front and rear door of the rack must be perforated and minimum open area should
be 70%.
• The site must also be as dust-free as possible. Dust tends to clog the system fans,
reducing the flow of cool air through the equipment rack and the systems that
occupy it, thus increasing the risk of an over temperature condition.
• The rack frame does not block the intake or exhaust ports when a chassis is
mounted in an open rack.
• The chassis cannot be installed on sliders.
• Adequate ventilation is available for equipment at the bottom of the rack. In an

enclosed rack with a ventilation fan in the top, excessive heat generated by
equipment near the bottom of the rack can be drawn upward into the intake ports
of the equipment.
• Avoid locating the Tejas device in a location in which the system air intake vents
may draw in the exhaust air from adjacent equipment.
• Baffles helps isolating exhaust air from intake air, which also helps to draw cooling
air through the chassis. The best placement of the baffles depends on the airflow
patterns in the rack. Experiment with different arrangements to position the baffles
effectively.
2.2.6 Power supply considerations

DC power supplies operate at a range of -40V DC to -57.6V DC. Check the power at your
site to ensure that you are receiving continuous power (free of spikes and noise). If
required, install a power conditioner.
10

Safety guidelines
2.3 Power filter unit (PFU)

When you install power feeds to the product input terminals or if you perform routine
power maintenance, make sure that you do the following:
• Read the power procedures before you perform any function.
• Use the appropriate insulated tools to perform any tasks.
• Before you work on equipment that is connected to power lines, remove jewelery
(including rings, necklaces, and watches). Metal objects heat up when connected
to power and ground and can cause serious burns or weld the metal object to the
terminals.
• Always unplug the power cable before you install or remove a power filter module
from the chassis. Follow the same procedure while installing or removing the
chassis.
• This product requires short-circuit (over current/circuit breaker) protection to be

provided as part of the building installation. Install only in accordance with national
and local wiring regulations.
If the green LED on the PFU is ON, the power at the associated feeder is present and the
conditions can be assumed to be normal. Some of the possible cases when the green
LED on the PFU is not ON are as follows:
• PFU is damaged or non-functional.
• Feeder low voltage or power failure.
• Over-current failure.
• Blown fuse in the PFU due to the reverse polarity condition at the input terminals.
The circuit breaker/OCP on the PFU is an electronic circuit breaker that cuts off the
power to the card on over-current condition.
CAUTION: The equipment might have more than one power supply
connection. All the connections must be removed to de-energize the equipment.
RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK: The battery feeds can be at a high

enough potential to constitute a shock hazard. Read the power procedures before
you perform any function. Take necessary precautions and use the appropriate
insulated tools when working with power.
11

RISK OF PERSONAL INJURY, ENERGY HAZARD: The battery feeds

are capable of supplying very high current which, during an unintentional short, can
cause burns. Read the power procedures before you perform any function. Take
necessary precautions and use the appropriate insulated tools when working with
power.
DANGER: Do not jack in/jack out PFU card in the system with Power
Cable connected. PFU has high energy and/or voltage level that can cause serious
electrocution or burn.
2.4 Dissipate static electricity

The static electricity level in your body increases when you move around or come into
contact with other charged surfaces. Excessive levels of static electricity can damage the
equipment. You must either wear a properly functioning heel grounder (that attaches to
your leg and foot) and/or an anti-static wrist-strap, or another grounding device when
you work on any of the following:
• Chassis (including the metal frame and cover)
• Cables connected to cards
• Cards
Any one of the previously mentioned grounding devices dissipates electrostatic charges
to the ground quickly and safely. Use grounding devices correctly to eliminate the ESD
threat you pose to the equipment.
When you wear an anti-static wrist-strap or a heel grounder, you must make sure that
the grounding straps are in contact with a moist part of your skin. Connect the
grounding cord to the grounding plug on a grounded fixture of the product you are
working on, such as the shelf ESD jack, grounded fixtures are accessible on most of the
products.
CAUTION: Heel grounders or similar worn footwear attachments work

when the floor is designed to dissipate static electricity. Check for the ESD foot wear
attachment connectivity to ground using suitable ESD tester. If the properties of the
floor are unknown or in doubt, use a wrist-strap and make sure that it is connected
12

Safety guidelines
to an unpainted metal surface of the grounded rack or an equipment or an earth

strip before proceeding with any maintenance or installation activity.
The following guidelines provide an optimal electrostatic discharge protection:
• Install bays on conductive floor coverings.
• Provide conductive shoes, anti-static wrist-straps and heel grounders to all

personnel working on the equipment.
• Maintain local environmental conditions so that relative humidity around

equipment to be serviced is in excess of 20% (preferably higher than 40%). This
lowers the threat of developing damaging electrostatic levels.
• Implement an ESD training and control program that educates personnel on the
hazards of ESD and simple mitigation procedures that can easily be applied.
2.5 Prevent damage to pluggable module

All pluggable modules are subjected to damage by inappropriate handling, manhandling
or by electrostatic discharges.
Note: Read the following precautions for handling electrostatic sensitive devices.
• Wear an anti-static wrist-strap, a heel grounder or any other personal grounding

device before you remove a module from its package or from the shelf.
• Follow installation and removal procedures for each module.
• Avoid touching the components, pin connector, or solder side of the module.
• Inspect all pin connectors for damage before using them on each module.
• Inspect each module for damage before inserting the component into the shelf.
• Allow each module to reach room temperature before you insert the module into
the shelf.
• When away from use, store pluggable modules in their protective static-dissipative
containers to prevent damage to the exposed connector terminals.
• Fan modules can be cleaned once every 3 months.
• To avoid switch damage from lightning, surge protectors are to be installed and
checked at regular intervals. If they are broken, need to replace.
13

2.6 Product operating temperature specification

Following table depicts the minimum and maximum operational long-term ambient
temperature of the system.
Table 1: Operating temperature specification
Operational long-term ambient temperature
Minimum Maximum
0°C; under 0°C is 40°C; exceeding 40°C is permissible with

permissible probability less than 1%.
A temperature of 50°C or -5°C is permissible but should not exceed the following:
• Duration: 96 continuous hours
• Days: 15 days in one year
• Occurrences: 15 times during a one-year period

See ETSI EN 300 019-1-3 V2.1.2 and ETSI EN 300 019-2-3 V2.1.2 for Environmental
Class 3.1.
2.7 Optical fibers

Optical fibers are either single-mode or multi-mode. The information in the following
sections applies to all optical fibers.
2.7.1 Handle optical fibers

Follow the steps while handling optical fibers:
• Wear safety glasses when you install optical fibers.
• Avoid looking into the opening of an optical fiber or the opening of an optical fiber
connector if the optical fiber is active or the power of the unit is on.
• Avoid direct exposure to optical fiber ends or optical connector ends where you can
access the laser signal directly.
LASER RADIATION EXPOSURE RISK: Avoid looking directly into

the optical beam. Invisible light can severely damage your eyes. Keep all optical
connectors capped.
14

3 Installation, commissioning, and
testing process
This chapter provides an overview of installation, commissioning, and testing process
flow of a TJ1600 node.
3.1 Overview
Following flowchart shows the installation, commissioning, and testing process:
Figure 5: Installation, commissioning, and testing process flow
17

3.2 Installation procedure

Installation procedure comprises of the following steps:
• Receiving and unpacking the node.
• Verifying the cards/inventories as per the packing list or BOQ (Bill Of Quantity).
• Installing the chassis on the rack followed by cards in the respective slots of the
chassis.
• Connecting grounding cable and power supply cables to the chassis.
• Connecting cables to the ports on the card.
3.3 Commissioning procedure

The commissioning is the formal handover of the operational and maintenance
responsibility for the end-product from the vendor to the operator. The process
comprises of operation and performance qualification and includes environment
compliance checks, verification of personnel protection equipment and qualification of
containment systems.
3.4 Testing procedure

The system level tests are required to be performed with the nodes in a working
network. After commissioning the node, system level tests are done with the nodes that
are cabled together in a working network. During the testing process, various forms
must be filled to record system data and test results.
18

4 Receive and unpack the node
This chapter describes the procedure to be followed during receiving and unpacking of a
TJ1600 node. These procedures must be followed when a Tejas node is delivered to the
customer as part of a supply-only contract.
4.1 Receive and unpack process

The following flowchart displays the receiving and unpacking process:
Figure 6: Receiving and unpacking process
4.2 Verify shipment

The TJ1600 node and the corresponding accessories are delivered in two different
cartons. Compare the package list information with the alphanumeric information
provided on the shipping labels. The package list and shipping labels should contain the
same information. If any discrepancies found between the shipping label information
and the package list information, contact the 24x7 Tejas Networks Technical Support
Center (TSC). For the contact details, refer Technical Support Information.
20

4.3 Handle packages

Identify the top face of the container (identifiable by packing labels) and keep the top
face uppermost at all times. The package contents are to be considered fragile at all
times. Apply sufficient water-proofing if packages are to be handled in wet weather
conditions.
4.4 Store packages

Follow the instructions mentioned when storing the packages:
• Unpack the node only during installation.
• After unpacking the node, preserve the packaging materials for future use.
• If the node is damaged during shipment, preserve as much of the packaging as

possible to allow customer service and the shipper to analyze the damage. To
report about damage shipped articles, contact the Tejas Networks Technical
Support Center (TSC) to open a Return Materials Authorization (RMA).
WEEE management
At the end of the product life cycle, approach the registered Waste Electrical and
Electronic Equipment (WEEE) management to dispose the electrical and electronic
equipment wastes.
4.5 Unpack the node

The product shipping container contains the product configured as ordered.
Before unpacking the node, make sure that you have the following tools:
• Sharp pointed blade or knife.
• Conductive bonded wrist strap.
Note: The images shown in this section are for representation only and not the
actual product.
Perform the following steps to unpack a node from its shipping container:
1. Place the container in a direction as per depicted in the packing label printed on the
container/packing box.
21

Figure 7: Packing label
2. Now cut and remove the ½" wide strap located at four places on the packing box as
shown in the following figure:
Figure 8: Straps on the packing box
3. Remove the plastic shrink wrap covering the box using a sharp pointed blade or
knife (optional, if present).
4. Cut and remove the reinforced packing tape from the packing box as shown in the
following figure:
22

Figure 9: Reinforced packing tape
5. Open the top of the packing box and take the equipment out of the packing box
along with the cushion.
23

Figure 10: Removing the equipment from box
6. Remove the packing cushion.
24

Figure 11: Removing the cushion
7. Take the node out of the anti-static bag.
25

Figure 12: Node covered with anti-static bag
8. Save the packaging materials in case the product needs repackaging or shipping.
STATIC DISCHARGE DAMAGE: Static charge can damage the

equipment. While unpacking and handling cards, or making node interconnections,
wear a grounding wrist strap to discharge the static buildup.
26

5 Slot distribution
This chapter provide details regarding the card population rules to be followed in
TJ1600-11, TJ1600-6, and TJ1600-2.
Note: Follow the card population rules listed in this chapter strictly.
5.1 Slot allotment

Slot allotment is the allocation of physical slots of the chassis to individual cards.
TJ1600-11
The slot allotment detail of TJ1600-11 is as follows:
• Tributary cards: Slots 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 9, 10, and 11
• Cross-connect cards or controller cards: Slots 5 and 6
• Power supply modules: Slots 12 and 13
• OAM card: Slot 14
• Fan Tray Unit (FTU): Slot 15
27

A diagrammatic representation of slot IDs assigned to TJ1600 Type-11SR chassis is as

follows:
Figure 13: TJ1600 Type-11SR: slot allotment
28

TJ1600-6
The slot allotment details of TJ1600-6 chassis is as follows:
• Power supply modules: Slots 7 and 8
• Controller cards: Slots 9 and 10
• OAM card: Slot 6
• Tributary cards: Slots 1, 2, 3 and 4
• FTU: Slot 5
A diagrammatic representation of Slot IDs assigned to TJ1600-6 chassis is as follows:
29

TJ1600-2
The slot allotment for TJ1600-2 is as follows:
• Slots 3 and 4 for power filter units
• Slot 5 for OAM and controller card
• Slots 1 and 2 for line cards
• Slot 6 for FTU

A diagrammatic representation of Slot IDs assigned to TJ1600-2 system is as follows:
5.2 Using the filler panels

Cover empty slots in the chassis with respective filler panels. Filler panels serve the
following important functions:
• They prevent exposure to voltages and currents inside the chassis.
• They block Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) that might disrupt other

equipment.
• They direct the flow of air through the chassis.
• They arrest the entry of dust into the chassis.
CAUTION: Do not operate the system unless all cards, power

modules, and filler panels are in place.
30

5.3 Slot distribution

This topic details the slot distribution of the cards supported in TJ1600-11, TJ1600-6,
and TJ1600-2 systems.
Note: Only TJ1600-6 and TJ1600-2 chassis can be configured both in 200G mode
and 600G mode.
Lower order client types are not supported in 400G mode.
Refer to the TJ1600 Product Family Hardware Description Guide for more
information about the system specifications.
• In this release, SONET mode is also supported for TJ1600-11, TJ1600-6 and
TJ1600-2 chassis in addition to SDH mode. However, the following conditions
apply:
— SONET interfaces are available for provisioning, if the system is installed with the Data
Path Mode as SONET_OTN or SONET_OTN_DWDM.
— System does not support SDH and SONET interfaces at the same time.
— Every line card which supports an SDH interface, also supports a corresponding SONET
interface when installed in the SONET mode.
— Depending on the line card, the corresponding SONET interfaces are seen in the UI for
provisioning.
• CEF-5 cards inserted in slots 1 comes up in standalone mode. If a mesh already

exists in the system, then cards inserted in the other mesh slots come up in
standalone mode only.
• In CEF-5 card, VCGs are supported in TJ1600-11 chassis when the Data Path Mode
is selected as SDH. The VCGs are not supported on TJ1600-11 chassis with Data
Path Mode as OTN.
• High power OFA (OFA-C-S26-FG/OFA-C-S23-FG), MDU-40E-C-100G and MDU-

40O-C-100G, PSCM, MDU-96-C-50G, ORA-C-450-FG are standalone units and not
installed in the chassis. Therefore, no slot numbers are assigned to these cards.
• ROADM-8-C-50G, MDU-16-CL-50G, and MDU-2x16CL-C is a double slot card;

hence cannot be used in slot 1 of TJ1600-2/TJ1600-6/TJ1600-11 and slot 7 of the
TJ1600-11 chassis.
• FPU01 card must be used with HCPADP01.
• MDU8-D must be used with adapter card HCPADP01 or HCPADP04.
• FPU02, VOA, OPM-2-C50G, OPM4-C-50G, OPM-4-C-FLX cards must be used with

adapter card HCPADP02.
• OADM-1-D,OADM-4-D, ILU-C-50G, ILU-C-100G, PSCM 1X8, CLF-S, and CLF-D

cards can be used with HCPADP02 or HCPADP03.
31

6 Card population rule
The following card population table summarizes the various cards/modules and the slot
distribution for the TJ1600 product family.
Table 2: Card population rule
Tributary card/ Card population

controller card
TJ1600-2 TJ1600-6 TJ1600-11
(OAMC) (OSMC01 OSMC01 HCPXCC04
)
OAMC 5 NA NA NA
OSMC01 NA 9, 10 5, 6 NA
HCPXCC04 NA NA NA 5, 6
HCPSLine03 1, 2 1 to 4 1 to 4 and 7 to 11 1 to 4 and 7 to 11
HCPSLine20 NA NA NA 1 to 4 and 7 to 11


HCPSLine28 1,2 1 to 4 1 to 4 and 7 to 11 1 to 4 and 7 to 11
HCPSLine29 1,2 1 to 4 1 to 3 and 7 to 10 1 to 3 and 7 to 10
HCPSLine31 2 2 to 4 2 to 4 and 8 to 11 2 to 4 and 8 to 11

CEF-5 NA 2 to 4 1 to 4 and 7 to 11 1 to 4 and 7 to 11
(One mesh switch (One mesh switch
in either 2, 3, 4 or in either 2, 3, 4 or
8, 9, 10) 8, 9, 10)
DWDM Cards
OFA 1, 2 1 to 4 1 to 4 and 7 to 11 1 to 4 and 7 to 11
ROADM-2-C-50G 1,2 1 to 4 1 to 4 and 7 to 11 1 to 4 and 7 to 11

ROADM-4-C-50G 1,2 1 to 4 1 to 4 and 7 to 11 1 to 4 and 7 to 11
32

Table 2: Card population rule
Tributary card/ Card population

controller card
TJ1600-2 TJ1600-6 TJ1600-11
(OAMC) (OSMC01 OSMC01 HCPXCC04
)
ROADM-8-C-50G 2 2 to 4 2 to 4 and 8 to 11 2 to 4 and 8 to 11
ROADM-8-C 1,2 1 to 4 1 to 4 and 7 to 11 1 to 4 and 7 to 11
ROADM-9-C 1,2 1 to 4 1 to 4 and 7 to 11 1 to 4 and 7 to 11
OPM-C-2/OPM-C-4/ 2 1 to 4 1 to 4 and 7 to 11 1 to 4 and 7 to 11
OPM-C-FLEX
FPU01/FPU02 2 1 to 4 1 to 4 and 7 to 11 1 to 4 and 7 to 11
VOA 2 1 to 4 1 to 4 and 7 to 11 1 to 4 and 7 to 11
OADM-1-D and 1, 2 1 to 4 1 to 4 and 7 to 11 1 to 4 and 7 to 11
OADM-4-D
MDU-8-D 1, 2 1 to 4 1 to 4 and 7 to 11 1 to 4 and 7 to 11
MDU-16-D 1, 2 1 to 4 1 to 4 and 7 to 11 1 to 4 and 7 to 11
MDU-16CL-C-50G 2 2 to 4 2 to 4 and 8 to 11 2 to 4 and 8 to 11
MDU-2x16CL-C 2 2 to 4 2 to 4 and 8 to 11 2 to 4 and 8 to 11
ILU-C-50G 1, 2 1 to 4 1 to 4 and 7 to 11 1 to 4 and 7 to 11
ILU-C-100G 1, 2 1 to 4 1 to 4 and 7 to 11 1 to 4 and 7 to 11
HCPADP01 2 1 to 4 1 to 4 and 7 to 11 1 to 4 and 7 to 11
HCPADP02 2 1 to 4 1 to 4 and 7 to 11 1 to 4 and 7 to 11
HCPADP03 1, 2 1 to 4 1 to 4 and 7 to 11 1 to 4 and 7 to 11
HCPADP04 1, 2 1 to 4 1 to 4 and 7 to 11 1 to 4 and 7 to 11
OTDR-2 2 1 to 4 1 to 4 and 7 to 11 1 to 4 and 7 to 11
OTDRF-2 1, 2 1 to 4 1 to 4 and 7 to 11 1 to 4 and 7 to 11
CLF-S 1, 2 1 to 4 1 to 4 and 7 to 11 1 to 4 and 7 to 11
CLF-D 1, 2 1 to 4 1 to 4 and 7 to 11 1 to 4 and 7 to 11
2xPSCM-1x8-C 1, 2 1 to 4 1 to 4 and 7 to 11 1 to 4 and 7 to 11
33

Card population rule
Note: The PSCM, Dispersion Compensation Module (DCM), OFA-C-S26-FG/OFA-C-

S23-FG, ORA, MDU40E-D, MDU40O-D, MDU-40E-C-100G, MDU-40O-C-100G, add
MDU-96-C-50G are standalone units and not installed on the chassis. Therefore, no
slot numbers mentioned for these cards.
The OSCF-S and OSCF-D modules are plugged into the OFA card. Therefore, no slot
numbers mentioned for these cards.
34

35

7 Install TJ1600 node
This chapter describes procedures to be followed when installing TJ1600 node. These
instructions are limited to address the installation of the TJ1600 node and cards supplied
by Tejas Networks. The installation of racks, electrical wiring, raceways, and other
equipment are not covered in this guide. The relevant local/state/federal or international
(if applicable) codes and regulations should be followed during the assembly.
7.1 Pre-installation checks

The guidelines for TJ1600 node installation are as follows:
• Ensure the equipment rack is properly bolted to the ground.
• Install the first node on the rack in the lowest possible position.
• Ensure that the wire size and dimension requirements are based on cable length
and local engineering standards and practices.
7.1.1 Pre-installation guidelines

• TJ1600 node must only be installed in a Restricted Access Location (RAL) in
accordance with IEC 60950-1. In this context, restricted access locations are
defined as locations where access can be restricted to suitably trained personnel
and where unsupervised members (of the general public) are not allowed.
• TJ1600 must be properly installed in a rack with brackets or in other ways properly
connected to a safety ground. The TJ1600 -48V DC must not be powered on from a
source external to the RAL. All the electrical interfaces used must be limited to
Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV).
• The user should follow the card population configuration strictly. Before inserting
any card into the node, the slot sticker label should be checked properly. Inserting
a card into unintended slot may cause permanent damage to the card.
• During installation, avoid using the handle of the FRU to lift or align the shelf. In an
unlikely event of fan not rotating while installing the FTUs, though the power
supply cord is working, it is recommended to remove those specific FTUs.
• Use appropriate filler panels for unused slots. If the filler is not installed, dust can
enter and block the fan rotors.
7.2 Site preparation

The installation site should meet the following criteria:
1. Power supply requirements: -40V to -57.6V DC
2. Circuit breaker requirements:
— 80A rating for TJ1600-11
— 25A (approximately) for TJ1600-6
— 20A telecom fuse for TJ1600-2
36

7.3 Preferred rack size

This chapter describes space occupied in the rack and rack details to be used while
installing TJ1600 chassis with baffles.
Table 3: Space occupied in the rack details for TJ1600-11 chassis with baffles
TJ1600-11 Rack size Chassis Chassis Baffle Number of

height mount mount chassis can
position position be mount
19'' Rack 14RU Vertical Horizontal 1
23" Rack 11RU Horizontal Horizontal 1

(design in
progress)
Note: For TJ1600-11, the chassis must be mounted vertically in the baffle for all
rack size.
TJ1600-6 Rack size Chassis Mount Number of

height position chassis can be
mount
19’’ Rack 14RU Vertical 1
23’’ Rack 7RU Horizontal 1
TJ1600-2 Rack size Chassis Mount Number of

height position chassis can be
mount
23’’ Rack 4RU Horizontal 1
37

Install TJ1600 node
7.4 Install TJ1600-11 chassis in a rack

In addition to the standard installer tool kit, the following items are also required for
installation:
• Phillips screwdriver (PH2): To install the node to the rack
• Eight M6 mounting screws and nuts
Note: It is recommended to install a TJ1600 chassis with HCPXCC04 cross-connect

card in an open rack.
Follow the steps to install the TJ1600 chassis in a rack.

1. Depending on the access requirements, decide which side you want to use as the
front side in the rack.
2. Determine the positioning of the chassis in the rack and the rack holes to be used
for mounting. Ensure that 9U space is available in the rack for node without baffles
and 14RU space is available in the rack for node with baffles.
Always install the node in a rack starting at the bottom and working upwards to
maintain the rack stability.
3. Do one of the following:
— If the rack holes are un-threaded but have bolt attached on rear side of the hole, then
directly go to next step.
— If the rack holes are square and un-threaded, attach eight cage nuts over the holes in
the rack post as shown in the following figure, four cage nuts on rear side of the holes
on each rack post.
Figure 16: Attaching cage nut on rack post
To install the node without baffles into the rack perform the following steps:
1. Move the node to the desired rack position.
2. Align the holes on the mount angle (both left and right) of the node with the
mounting holes in the rack.
3. If cable routers/guides are desired to be installed (optional), then position the
cable router/guide so that its mounting holes are aligned with holes on node mount
angle and the rack post holes.
38

4. Install the eight M6 screws through the holes of the cable router/guide, node
mount angles, rack post, and into the cage nuts to secure the chassis to the rack
post. Use Phillips screwdriver for tightening the screws.
Following figure shows the installation of the chassis to the rack.

Figure 17: Installing TJ1600 POTP chassis in a rack
To install the node with baffles into the rack, perform the following steps:
Note: The TJ1600-11 system must be rotated 90° to assemble inside the baffle.
1. Assemble TJ1600 baffle on the rack mount railings as displayed in the image.
Install the eight M6 screws to secure the baffle on the rack mount railings. Use
Phillips screwdriver for tightening the screws.
39

Install TJ1600 node
Figure 18: Install TJ1600 baffle on the rack
2. Remove the mount angles (both left and right) attached to TJ1600-11 system and
reverse mount them to install the system in the baffle.
40

Figure 19: Reverse mount the mount angle
3. Before mounting the TJ1600-11 system inside the baffle, assemble the grounding
cable to the system. For more details refer to Connect grounding or Earth cable.
4. Assemble the TJ1600-11 system into the baffle as displayed in the following image:
41

Install TJ1600 node
Figure 20: Install enclosure assemble on the baffle
Note: Ensure FTU is on the top side.
5. Assemble the cable router on TJ1600-11 system. The final assembly of TJ1600-11
with baffles is as follows:
42

Figure 21: Final TJ1600 Type-11SR node with baffle
43

Install TJ1600 node
Figure 22: Final TJ1600 Type-11SR node with baffle (Front view)
Figure 23: Final TJ1600 Type-11SR node with baffle (side view)
Note: The same procedure must be used to install TJ1600-11 chassis on 21"/23"
rack.
44


To install TJ1600-6 chassis without baffles in a rack
TJ1600-6 requires four standard mounting units (4U) of vertical space in a 19-inch rack.
The mount angles (Left and Right) are generally factory installed on the chassis.
Associated rack-mounting hardware is supplied in the accessory kit which includes
screws and nuts to secure the chassis on rack and cable routers for cable management.
Tools and equipments required
In addition to the standard installer tool kit, following tools and equipments are required
for the node installation:
• Phillips screwdriver: To install the node into the rack
• Four M6 mounting screws and four cage nuts
• Cable Routers/Guides (one left and one right)
Mounting the chassis in a rack
Perform the following steps to install the TJ1600-6 chassis into the rack:
for mounting. Ensure that 4U space is available in the rack.
3. Do the suitable step of the following:
directly go to step 4.
— If the rack holes are square and un-threaded, attach four cage nuts over the holes in
the rack post as shown in the following figure. Two cage nuts on rear side of the holes
on each rack post.
45

Install TJ1600 node
7. Install the four M6 screws through the holes of the cable router/guide, node mount
angles, rack post, and into the cage nuts to secure the chassis to the rack post. Use
Phillips screwdriver for tightening the screws.
46

The following figure shows the installation of the chassis to the rack:
Figure 25: Installing TJ1600 Type-6SR chassis in a rack
To install TJ1600-6 chassis with baffles in a rack
TJ1600-6 requires 14RU of vertical space in a 19"/21" rack and 7RU of vertical space on
23" rack.
Note: TJ1600-6 chassis with baffles must be mounted vertically on 19"/21" rack.
For 23" rack, the chassis with baffles must be mounted horizontally.
Tools and equipment required
• Twelve M6 screws and nuts

Perform the following steps to install the TJ1600-6 chassis with baffles into the rack:
For 23" rack with baffles

1. Ensure rubber grommet is assembled at the rear side of the received baffle.
2. Assemble the baffle on the rack. Install the eight M6 screws to secure the baffle on
47

Install TJ1600 node
the rack mount railings. Use Phillips screwdriver for tightening the screws.
3. Pass the grounding cable through rubber grommet. Assemble the grounding cable
to TJ1600-6 system. For more details refer Connect grounding or Earth cable.
4. Insert TJ1600-6 system into the baffle. Assemble the TJ1600-6 system into the
baffle using four M6 screws and use Phillips screwdriver for tightening the screws.
The following images display TJ1600-6 chassis with baffle:
For 23" rack, the chassis with baffle must be mounted horizontally.
Figure 26: Baffle in horizontal orientation for 23" rack
For 19"/21" rack with baffles

2. Assemble 19"/21" horizontal support brackets in the rack.
48

Figure 27: Install horizontal support brackets on the rack
3. Assemble the baffle vertically onto the horizontal support brackets. Install eight M6
screws to secure the baffle on the rack and use Phillips screw driver for tightening
the screws.
Figure 28: Install the baffle on the rack
to TJ1600-6 system. For more details refer Connect grounding or Earth cable.
49

Install TJ1600 node
5. Insert TJ1600-6 system into the baffle. Ensure FTU side of the chassis should be
there at fan side of the baffle. Assemble the TJ1600-6 system into the baffle using
four M6 screws and use Phillips screwdriver for tightening the screws.
For 19"/21" rack, the chassis with baffle must be mounted vertically.
Figure 29: Baffle in vertical orientation for 19"/21" rack

To install TJ1600-2 chassis without baffles in a rack
TJ1600-2 node requires two standard mounting units (2U) of vertical space in a 19-inch
rack. The mount angles (Left and Right) are generally factory installed on the chassis.
Associated rack-mounting hardware is supplied in the accessory kit which includes
screws and nuts to secure the chassis on rack and cable routers for cable management.
Tools and equipments required
In addition to the standard installer tool kit, the following items are also required for
installation:
• Phillips screwdriver (PH2): To install the node to the rack.
• Four M6 mounting screws and cage nuts.
• Cable Routers/Guides (one left and one right).
• Plugs for optical adapters.
Mounting the chassis in a rack
Perform the following steps to install the TJ1600-2 chassis in a rack:

50

for mounting. Ensure that 2U space is available in the rack.
— If the rack holes are square and un-threaded, attach cage nuts in rear side of holes on
both the rack posts, two on each that is, left rack post and the corresponding holes in
right rack post.Attaching cage nut on rack post

7. Attach four M6 screws through the holes of the cable router/guide, chassis mount
angles, rack post, and into the cage nuts to secure the chassis to the rack post. Use
Phillips screwdriver for tightening the screws. The fastening of screws is to be done
at both ends uniformly. Engage two to three threads on both ends before tighten-
ing the screws completely. It is important to align the screws to the holes prior to
tightening to avoid screw jamming.
51

Install TJ1600 node
Following figure shows the installation of the TJ1600-2 chassis in the rack:
Figure 31: Installing chassis onto the rack
To install TJ1600-2 chassis with baffles in a rack
TJ1600-2 requires 14RU of vertical space in a 19"/ 21" rack and 4RU of vertical space on
23-inch rack.
Note: TJ1600-2 chassis with baffles must be mounted vertically on 19"/ 21" rack.
For 23" rack, the chassis with baffles must be mounted horizontally.
Tools and equipment required
• Eight M6 screws and nuts

Perform the following steps to install the TJ1600-2 chassis with baffles into the rack:
For 23" rack with baffles

52

2. Assemble the baffle on the rack. Install four M6 screws to secure the baffle on the
rack and use Phillips screw driver for tightening the screws.
Figure 32: Assemble the baffle on the rack
to TJ1600-2 system. For more details refer to Connect grounding or Earth cable.
4. Insert TJ1600-2 system into the baffle at certain angle. Assemble the TJ1600-2
system into the baffle using four M6 screws and use Phillips screwdriver for tight-
ening the screws.
53

Install TJ1600 node
Figure 33: Insert the chassis inside the baffle
The following images display TJ1600-2 chassis with baffle:

For 23" rack, the chassis with baffle must be mounted horizontally.
Figure 34: Horizontal orientation for 23" rack
For 19"/21" rack with baffles:

2. Assemble 19"or 21" horizontal support brackets in the rack.
54

Figure 35: Install horizontal support brackets on the rack
3. Assemble the baffle vertically onto the horizontal support brackets. Install four M6
screws to secure the baffle on the rack and use Phillips screw driver for tightening
the screws.
Figure 36: Assemble the baffle on the rack
to TJ1600-2 system. For more details refer to Connect grounding or Earth cable.
55

Install TJ1600 node
5. Insert TJ1600-2 system into the baffle at certain angle. Ensure FTU side of the
chassis should be there at fan side of the baffle. Assemble the TJ1600-2 system
into the baffle using four M6 screws and use Phillips screwdriver for tightening the
screws.
For 19"/21" rack, the chassis with baffle must be mounted vertically
Figure 37: Vertical orientation for 19"/21" rack
7.7 Connect grounding or Earth cable

The equipment is required to be grounded properly in order to reduce the risk of
component damage due to ESD and prevent or minimize the shock hazards. TJ1600
system is grounded through safety earthing terminal present on chassis' left view, and
indicated by an Earth ground symbol. Two threaded holes with M6 screws are provided
on the chassis frame to attach the grounding cable. The chassis is also grounded
through the -48V power connector to the rack ground.
Note 1: The chassis to earth ground connection should be made before connecting
cables or powering the equipment.
Note 2: All cables used for connectivity must be labeled according to the site
engineering practices.
Note 3: While installing or replacing the unit, always ensure that the earthing
terminal is installed first and removed last.
56

Prerequisites
for making the ground connection:
• Grounding cable
• Grounding screws: Two M6 screws; factory installed on the chassis but removable.
• Phillips screwdriver: to install the grounding cable to the chassis.
• Multimeter
• Cable ties
Grounding cable connection
Perform the following steps to connect the grounding cable to the chassis:
1. Face towards the right view of the chassis and locate the safety earth terminal as
57

Install TJ1600 node
Figure 38: Safety earth terminal on TJ1600 Type-2SR chassis
The following figure shows the safety earth terminal for TJ1600-6:
Figure 39: Safety earth terminal on TJ1600 Type-6SR chassis
The following figure shows the safety earth terminal for TJ1600-11:
58

Figure 40: Safety earth terminal on TJ1600 Type-11SR
2. Depending on the grounding cable available, perform one of the following:

— In case of single-hole grounding lug, remove any one M6 screw on the chassis using
Phillips screwdriver and then go to step 3.
— In case of double-hole grounding lug, remove the two M6 screws on the chassis using
Phillips screwdriver and then go to step 3.
Note: The chassis is adequately grounded using a single-hole grounding lug. A

double-hole lug provides added grounding protection to the chassis. The accessory
kit includes a single-hole lug grounding cable only.
3. Place lug end of the grounding cable against the threaded hole. Align and then
secure the grounding lug to the chassis with the M6 screw removed in the previous
step (two M6 screws in case of double-hole grounding lug).
4. Route the grounding cable securely along the rack and attach the other end of the
cable to DC ground point.
5. Verify that the grounding is proper by measuring the resistance between the chas-
sis ground connection point and the rack ground connection point using a multime-
ter. If the value is less than 0.1 ohm, chassis is grounded properly.
Bonding topologies
Bonding is a complementary feature to, but should not be confused with, protective
grounding and is intended to create equipotent nodes throughout the office installation.
Marked locations bearing the symbol illustrated in the following figure to identify sites
that can be used to bond equipment but are not intended for safety grounding. The
59

Install TJ1600 node
Protective earthing conductor can be connected using either of these topologies to

satisfy the mandatory (safety) grounding dependencies.
The TJ1600 supports connection to and installation in the following equipment bonding
topologies:
• CBN: Common Bonding Network - This is the principal means for effecting bonding
and earthing inside a telecommunication building. It is the set of metallic
components that are intentionally or incidentally interconnected to form the
principal BN in a building. These components include: structural steel or reinforcing
rods, metallic plumbing, ac power conduit, ACEG conductors, cable racks, and
bonding conductors. The CBN always has a mesh topology and is connected to the
grounding electrode system.
• IBN: lsolated Bonding Network - A bonding network that has a single point of
connection (SPC) from the network element (for example, shelf or rack) to either
the common bonding network or another isolated bonding network. All IBNs have a
connection to earth through the SPC.
• Mesh BN:A bonding network in which all associated equipment frames, racks, and
cabinets, and usually, the DC power return conductor, are intentionally bonded
together as well as at multiple points to the CBN. Consequently, the mesh-BN
augments the CBN.
Figure 41: Bonding topologies
There are two supported DC Return implementations supported within the Bonding
Network topologies:
• Common DC Return (DC-C): An implementation where the battery return is

bonded to the surrounding BN, either in a mesh or isolated topology. This is often
implemented as a bond to the local framework or bonding hardware.
• Isolated DC Return (DC-I): An implementation of the battery return where the

network element has a separate DC return, isolated from other BNs until a single
connection point, often at the power source, where connection to the CBN is
implemented.
7.8 Connect the power cables

This section covers procedure for connecting power cable to the PFU in a TJ1600 node.
60

CAUTION: This equipment might have more than one power supply
connection. All connections must be removed to de-energize the equipment before
accessing internal parts for maintenance or service. To avoid damage to the power
filter unit, do not insert/removal the unit when power cable is connected to it.
7.8.1 HCPPFU02
TJ1600 chassis is powered by connecting -48V DC and 0V return through HCPPFU02
cards. TJ1600 node has redundant power filter unit and each HCPPFU02 card is
separately powered and fed through independent circuit breaker.
For cable color details, refer to HCPPFU02 power cable section in chapter Cable color
codes.
connection. All connection must be removed to de-energize the equipment.
Prerequisites
• Ensure that the circuit breaker feeding power to the node is switched off.
• Ensure that the chassis is grounded properly as described in the topic Connect
grounding or Earth cable.
• Ensure that the PFUs are properly installed into the chassis, as described in the
topic Insert and eject the PFU.
• Also make sure that the following tools and materials are available:
— Standard installer tool kit
— Two power cables per TJ1600 system
— Phillips screwdriver
— Cable ties
Power supply cable connection
Follow the steps to connect the power cable to PFU (HCPPFU02):

1. Identify the two slots (S12 and S13) on the chassis where PFUs are present.
2. Each PFU has two factory fitted screws on the power supply interface for securing
the power cable when connecting. Remove those two screws from the interface and
keep aside to use in step 4.
3. Insert the power cable to the power supply interface on HCPPFU02 of slot 12. While
plugging, properly align the connector end of the power cable to the interface on
HCPPFU02. Do not forcefully plug-in the cable.
4. Secure the cable connector to the chassis with two screws using Phillips precision
screwdriver.
61

Install TJ1600 node
5. Repeat step 2 to 4 to connect the power cable to the power supply interface on
HCPPFU02 of the other slot S13.
6. Route the power cables through cable router/guide along the left side of the rack.
Figure 42: Connecting PFU (HCPPFU02 Card)
7.8.2 PFU4
TJ1600-6 system is powered by connecting -48V DC and 0V return through PFU4
module. The system has redundant PFUs and each PFU4 module is separately powered
and fed through independent circuit breaker.
62

For cable color details, refer to the topic PFU4 power cable in the chapter Cable color
codes.
CAUTION: To avoid damage to PFU4 module, do not remove the card

when power cable is connected to the card. This equipment might have more than
one power supply connection. All connection must be removed to de-energize the
equipment.
Prerequisites
• Ensure that the circuit breaker feeding power to the node is switched off.
• Ensure that the chassis is grounded properly as described in the topic Connect
• Ensure that the PFUs are properly installed into the chassis, as described in the
topic Insert and eject the PFU.
• Also make sure that the following tools and materials are available:
— standard installer tool kit
— Two power cables per TJ1600-6 system
— Cable ties
Power supply cable connection
Perform the following steps to connect the power cable to PFU:

1. Identify the two slots (S7 and S8) on the chassis where PFUs are present.
2. Generally each PFU has two factory fitted screws on the power supply interface for
securing the power cable when connecting. Remove those two screws from the
interface and keep aside to use in step 4.
3. Insert the power cable to the power supply interface on PFU4 of slot 7. While plug-
ging, properly align the connector end of the power cable to the interface on PFU4.
Do not forcefully plug-in the cable.
4. Secure the cable connector to the chassis with two screws using Phillips precision
screwdriver.
5. Repeat step 2 to 4 to connect the power cable to the power supply interface on
PFU4 of the other slot S8.
6. Route the power cables through cable router/guide along the left side of the rack.
63

Install TJ1600 node
Following figure shows the power supply connectors on PFU4 modules:

Figure 43: Power cable connection- HCPPFU4
7.8.3 PFU
TJ1600-2 node is powered by connecting -48V DC and 0V return through PFU. The node
has redundant power filter units; each PFU is separately powered and fed through
independent circuit breaker.
Prerequisites
Before making the power supply connection, ensure that:
• The circuit breaker feeding power to the node is switched off.
• The chassis is grounded properly. For more information, refer to Connect

• The power filter unit(s) are properly installed on the chassis.
• You have the following tools and materials available:

— Standard installer tool kit
— Two power cables per system
— Cable ties
64

8 Connect ports on HCPOAM01 card
This chapter describes the procedures for connecting ports on HCPOAM01 card
supported in the TJ1600 chassis.
For installing cards/units on the chassis, refer to installation procedure of that card/unit.
8.1 Alarm connection

Alarm-In port is used to report external events such as AC fail, door open in the NE
alarm page. Alarm-Out port is used to send NE alarms to external devices such as LED
panels, buzzers for indication. The alarm terminals communicate to TJ1600 through RJ-
45 connectors on the HCPOAM01 card. TJ1600 supports 7 alarm inputs and 4 alarm
outputs.
For connector pin assignment details, refer to sections Alarm input connector and Alarm
output connector in Connector Pin Assignment. For cable color code details refer to
Alarm-in cable and Alarm-out cable section in Cable Color Codes.
Follow the procedure for connecting cable to the Alarm-Out and Alarm-In ports:
1. Identify and label the cable.
2. Connect the cable to RJ-45 connector accordingly as indicated by the arrow-heads
marked against the connectors.
3. Route the alarm cable from the Alarm-Out port securely along the cable routers on
the left or right side of the rack and connect it to the audio/visual unit.
68

The following figure shows Alarm-Out and Alarm-In ports on HCPOAM01 module:
Figure 45: Alarm-Out and Alarm-In ports connection (HCPOAM01 Card)
69

Connect ports on HCPOAM01 card
Following table describes Alarm-Out severity levels:

Table 6: Alarm-Out severity levels
Alarm-Out pin (RJ-45) Alarm-Out severity
1, 2 Not Used
3, 4 Minor
5, 6 Major
7, 8 Critical
8.2 ESI connection

Ethernet Segment Identifier (ESI) port is used for clock synchronization from an
external source. The clock terminal communicate to TJ1600 through RJ-45 connectors
on the HCPOAM01 card.
For connector pin assignment details, refer to ESI connection in Connector pin
assignment. For cable color code details refer to section ESI cable in Cable color
codes.
Follow the procedure for connecting cable to the ESI port:
2. Connect the cable to the clock RJ-45 connector.
3. Route the clock cable through the cable routers securely along the left side or right
side of the rack.
70

The following figure shows the ESI port on HCPOAM01 module:

Figure 46: ESI port connection (HCPOAM01 Card)
8.3 Craft connection

Craft port provides access to NE through default IP address and has auto-detect IP
mechanism (DHCP). The craft access terminals communicate to TJ1600 using an RJ-45
connector on craft port on HCPOAM01 card.
For connector pin assignment details, refer to section Craft connector in Connector pin
assignment. For cable color code details refer section Craft cable in Cable color
codes.
71

Follow the procedure for connecting cable to craft port:

1. Identify and label the cables.
2. Connect the cable to RJ-45 connector.
3. Route the craft cable through the cable routers securely along the left side or right
side of the rack.
72

The following figure shows the craft port on HCPOAM01 module:

Figure 47: Craft port connection (HCPOAM01 Card)
73

8.4 M1/F1 connection

M1/F1 port provides 64kbps User Data Channel (UDC). The M1/F1 access terminals
communicate to TJ1600 using an RJ-45 connector on M1/F1 port on HCPOAM01 card.
For connector pin assignment details, refer to section M1/F1 connector in Connector
pin assignment. For cable color code details refer to section M1/F1 cable in Cable
color codes.
Follow the procedure for connecting cable to the M1/F1 port:
3. Route the cable through the cable routers securely along the left side or right side
of the rack.
74

The following figure shows the M1/F1 port on HCPOAM01 module:

Figure 48: M1/F1 connection (HCPOAM01 Card)
8.5 LAN connection

LAN port provides local access to NE. When in factory default, NE can be accessed by
using default IP. LAN access terminals communicate to TJ1600 using an RJ-45 connector
on LAN port on HCPOAM01 card.
For connector pin assignment details, refer section LAN/MGN connector in Connector
pin assignment. For cable color code details refer section LAN/MGN cable in Cable
color codes.
75

Follow the procedure for connecting cable to the LAN port:

3. Route the LAN cable through the cable routers securely along the left side or right
side of the rack.
76

The following figure shows the LAN port on HCPOAM01 module:

Figure 49: LAN port connection (HCPOAM01 Card)
8.6 MGN cable connection

MGN port provides management of extended chassis using a single IP address and
external equipment management. MGN access terminals communicate to TJ1600 using
an RJ-45 connector on MGN ports on the OAM card.
For connector pin assignment details, refer section LAN/MGN connector in Appendix
Connector Pin Assignment. For cable color code details refer section LAN/MGN cable
in Appendix Cable Color Coding.
77

Follow the procedure to connect the cable to the MGN1/MGN2/MGN3/MGN4/MGN5 port:

2. Connect the RJ-45 cable connector to the MGN (RJ-45) port.
3. Route the MGN cable securely along the right side of the rack.
78

The following figure shows the MGN port on HCPOAM01 module:

Figure 50: MGN port connection (HCPOAM01 Card)
79

9 Connect ports on HCPOAM03 card
This chapter describes the interface connections for HCPOAM03 card supported on a
TJ1600-6 node.
For installing cards/units on the chassis, refer to installation procedure of that card/unit
covered under the section General procedures.
9.1 Alarm ports connection

HCPOAM03 card provides seven external alarm inputs and four external alarm outputs.
The alarm terminals communicate to the system through RJ-45 interfaces on the
HCPOAM03 card. For cable color details, refer Alarm-In cable, Alarm-Out cable section in
Cable Color Codes.
Perform the following steps for connecting cables to the alarm interfaces:
2. Identify the chassis slot with HCPOAM03 card and the Alarm-In, Alarm-Out ports
on the card where the cables need to be connected.
3. Connect the cable to RJ-45 connector accordingly as indicated by the arrow-heads
marked against the connectors.
4. Route the alarm-in cable to the Alarm-In port.
5. Route the alarm-out cable from the Alarm-Out port securely along the cable rout-
ers on the left or right side of the rack and connect it to the audio/visual unit.
80

The following figure shows Alarm-Out port on HCPOAM03 card:

Figure 51: Connecting HCPOAM03 card interfaces- Alarm-In
The following table describes Alarm-Out severity levels:

Table 7: Alarm-Out severity levels
Alarm-Out pin (RJ-45) Alarm-Out severity
1,2 Not Used
3,4 Minor
5,6 Major
7,8 Critical
9.2 LNMS/NMS1/NMS2 cable connection

LNMS, NMS1, NMS2 access terminals communicate to the node using an RJ-45 interface
on HCPOAM03 card. For cable color details, refer to LNMS/NMS1/NMS2 cable connection
in the Cable Color Codes.
Perform the following steps for connecting cable to the LNMS/NMS1/NMS2 interface:
2. Identify the chassis slot with HCPOAM03 card and the LNMS/NMS1/NMS2 port on
the card where the cable has to be connected.
3. Connect the RJ-45 cable connector to the LNMS/NMS1/NMS2 port.
81

4. Route the LNMS/NMS1/NMS2 cable through the cable routers securely along the
left side of the rack.
The following figure shows the LNMS, NMS1, and NMS2 ports on HCPOAM03 card:
Figure 52: Connecting HCPOAM03 card interfaces- LNMS, NMS1, and NMS2
9.3 Craft cable connection

The craft access terminals communicate to the system using an RJ-45 connector on craft
interface on HCPOAM03 card. For cable color details, refer to Craft cable the Cable
Color Codes.
Note: Craft port is not supported for this release.
Perform the following steps for connecting cable to the craft interface:
2. Identify the chassis slot with HCPOAM03 card and the craft port on the card where
the cable needs to be connected.
3. Connect the RJ-45 connector cable to the craft port.
4. Route the craft cable securely through the cable router/guide along the left side or
right side of the rack.
82

The following figure shows the craft port on HCPOAM03 card:

Figure 53: Connecting HCPOAM03 card interfaces- Craft
83

10 Connect ports on OAMC card
This chapter describes procedures for connecting ports on OAMC card supported in
TJ1600-2 node.
Note 1: Ports P1 and BITS are not supported in this release.

Note 2: The DIAG (diagnostic) port is meant for use by authorized Tejas Networks
personnel only.
For installing cards/units in the chassis, refer to installation procedure of that card/unit
10.1 Alarm ports connection

Alarm-In port is used to report external events such as AC fail, door open in the NE
alarm page. Alarm-Out port is used to send NE alarms to external devices such as LED
panels, buzzers for indication. The alarm terminals communicate to TJ1600-2 through
RJ-45 connectors on OAMC card. OAMC card provides 7 external alarm inputs and 4
external alarm outputs.
For connector pin assignment details, refer to Alarm ports connection and Alarm output
connector in Connector Pin Assignment. For cable color code details refer to sections
Alarm-in cable and Alarm-out cable in Cable Color Codes. The TJ1600 supports 7 alarm
inputs and 4 alarm outputs.
Perform the following steps for connecting cables to Alarm-In and Alarm-Out ports on
OAMC card:
2. Look towards front of the chassis, identify the chassis slot with OAMC card and the
Alarm-In/Alarm-Out ports on the card where the cables need to be connected.
3. Connect the cables to RJ-45 connectors accordingly as indicated by arrows marked
against the connectors in the following figure. Ensure that the retention clip oper-
ates to hold the connector in place.
84

The following figure shows Alarm-Out and Alarm-In ports on OAMC card:
Figure 54: ALARM IN and ALARM OUT ports- OAMC card
4. Route the alarm-in cable to the Alarm-In port.

5. Route the alarm-out cable from the Alarm-Out port securely along the right side of
the rack and connect it to the audio/visual unit.
The following table describes ALARM-OUT severity levels:
Table 8: ALARM OUT severity levels
Alarm-Out pin (RJ-45) Alarm-Outs Severity
1, 2 Not Used
3, 4 Minor
5, 6 Major
7, 8 Critical
10.2 NMS port connection

NMS port provides local access to NE. NMS access terminals communicate to TJ1600-2
using an RJ-45 connector on port P5 on OAMC card.
For Connector pin assignment details, refer section NMS connector in Connector Pin
Assignment. For cable color code details refer section NMS cable in Cable Color
Codes.
Perform the following steps for connecting cable to NMS port on OAMC card:
port P5 (NMS) on the card where the cable needs to be connected.
3. Connect the RJ-45 cable connector to the port. Ensure that the retention clip oper-
4. Route the cable securely along the right side of the rack.
85

Connect ports on OAMC card
The following figure shows NMS port on OAMC card:

Figure 55: NMS port- OAMC card
10.3 LCT port connection

The Local Craft Terminal (LCT) provides access to NE through default IP address and has
auto-detect IP mechanism (DHCP). LCT access terminals communicate to TJ1600-2
using an RJ-45 connector on port P4 on OAMC card.
For Connector pin assignment details, refer to LCT connector in Connector Pin
Assignment For cable color code details refer to LCT cable Cable Color Codes.
Perform the following procedure for connecting cable to LCT port on OAMC card:
port P4 (LCT) on the card where the cable needs to be connected.
3. Connect the RJ-45 cable connector to the port. Ensure that the retention clip oper-
4. Route the cable securely along the right side of the rack.
86

Figure 56: LCT Port- OAMC Card
10.4 OSC ports connection

Optical Supervisory Channel (OSC) is used to receive management information. An OSC
filter is used to add/drop the OSC channel. TJ1600-2 provides OSC1 and OSC2 interface
on OAMC card through ports P2 and P3.
Before making any port connection, ensure that proper form-factor pluggable has been
inserted onto the port.
OPTICAL SAFETY: Do not stare or look directly into the optical

connector output beam, as this can cause irreparable damage to your eyes and even
loss of eye sight.
Perform the following steps for connecting cable to OSC1/OSC2 port on OAMC card:
1. Identify and label the LC connector cable.
2. Identify the chassis slot with OAMC card and the OSC port on the card where the
cables need to be connected.
3. Connect the LC connector cable to the transmit and the receive interface of OSC1/
OSC2 port. Ensure that the retention slide operates to hold the connector in place.
4. Route the cable securely along right side of the rack.
87

Connect ports on OAMC card
Figure 57: OSC ports- OAMC Card
88

11 Connect optical ports on cards
This chapter covers the procedures for connecting cable to the optical ports on the card.
Refer to TJ1600 Product Family Hardware Description Guide for more information
on interface type supported on a card based on cross connect card used in the system.
11.1 TJ1600-11
This section details the procedure for connecting the cables to the optical ports on the
cards supported on TJ1600-11 chassis.
11.1.1 Connect STM-1 ports

The traffic is received and transmitted from the TJ1600 through STM-1 ports available
on HCPULine01, HCPSLine08 and HCPSLine20 cards. The connectivity is made through
LC connectors. Before making port connection, ensure that proper SFP pluggable is
inserted on to the port.
Perform the following steps to connect LC connector cable to STM-1 port:
1. Identify and label the LC connector cables.
2. Connect the cable to the LC connector securely.
3. Route the cables through the cable routers securely along the left side or right side
of the rack.
90

The following figure shows the STM-1 connections in HCPULine01 card:

Figure 58: STM-1 Connection (HCPULine01 Card)
91

Connect optical ports on cards
The following figure shows the STM-1 connections in HCPSLine08 card:

Figure 59: STM-1 Connection (HCPSLine08 Card)
92

The following figure shows STM-1 connections in HCPSLine20 card (SDH Only mode):
Figure 60: STM-1 Connections (HCPSLine20 Card)

on HCPULine01, HCPSLine08, and HCPSLine20 cards. The connectivity is made through
LC connectors. Before making port connection, ensure that proper SFP pluggable has
been inserted on to the port.
of the rack.
93

The following figure shows STM-4 connections in HCPULine01 card:

94

The following figure shows STM-4 connections in HCPSLine08 card:

95


Figure 63: STM-4 Connections (HCPSLine20 Card)

on HCPULine01, HCPSLine08 and HCPSLine20 cards. The connectivity is made through
LC connectors. Before making port connection, ensure that proper SFP pluggable has
2. Connect the LC connector cable securely to the STM-16 ports.
of the rack.
96

The following figure shows STM-16 connections in HCPULine01 card:

97


98

The following figure shows STM-16 connections in HCPSLine20 card (SDH Only Mode):
Figure 66: STM-16 connections in HCPSLine20 card (SDH Only Mode)

on HCPSLine01, HCPSLine03, HCPSLine08, HCPSLine12, HCPSLine20, HCPSLine22,
HCPSLine25, HCPSLine26, HCPSLine27, HCPSLine31, and HCPSLine33 cards. The
connectivity is made through LC connectors. Before making port connection, ensure that
proper SFP+XFP pluggable is inserted to the port.
2. Connect the LC connector cables securely to the STM-64 port.
of the rack.
99



Figure 68: STM64 Connections (HCPSLine03 Card)
Note: The FEC on HCPSLine03 card is Tejas proprietary.
100

The following figure displays STM-64 connections in HCPSLine08 card:

101


Figure 70: STM-64/OC-192 Connections (HCPSLine12 Card)


102

Figure 73: STM-64 Connection (HCPSLine25 card)
The following figure display STM-64 connection on HCPSLine26 card:

Figure 74: STM-64 Connection- HCPSLine26
103

The following figure displays STM-64 connection on HCPSLine27:

Figure 75: STM-64 Connection- HCPSLine27 card
104


Figure 76: STM-64 Connection- HCPSLine31 Card
105


11.1.5 Connect OTU1 ports

The traffic is received and transmitted from the TJ1600 through OTU1 ports available on
HCPSLine08 card. The connectivity is made through LC connectors. Before making port
connection, ensure that proper SFP pluggable has been inserted on to the port.
Perform the following steps to connect LC connector cable to OTU1 port:
2. Connect the LC connector cable securely to the OTU1 ports.
of the rack.
106

The following figure shows OTU1 connection in HCPSLine08 card:

Figure 78: OTU1 Connection (HCPSLine08 card)
11.1.6 Connect OTU1f ports

The traffic is received and transmitted from the TJ1600 through OTU1f ports available on
ports P6 to P10 on HCPSLine22 card. The connectivity is made through LC connectors.
Before making port connection, ensure that proper XFP/SFP+ pluggable has been
inserted on to the ports.
Perform the following steps to connect LC connector cable to OTU1f port:
2. Connect the LC connector cables securely to the OTU1f.
107

of the rack.
The following figure shows OTU1f ports in HCPSLine22 card:
Figure 79: OTU1f Connection- HCPSLine22 card
11.1.7 Connect OTU2/OTU2e ports

The traffic is received and transmitted from the TJ1600 through OTU2/OTU2e ports
available on HCPSLine03, HCPSLine08, HCPSLine12, HCPSLine22, HCPSLine25,
HCPSLine26, HCPSLine27, HCPSLine31, and HCPSLine33 cards. The connectivity is
made through LC connectors. Before making port connection, ensure that proper XFP/
SFP+ pluggable has been inserted on to the ports.
Perform the following steps to connect LC connector cable to OTU2/OTU2e port:
2. Connect the LC connector cables securely to the OTU2/OTU2e.
108

of the rack.
The following figure shows OTU2/OTU2e connection in HCPSLine03 card:
Figure 80: OTU2/OTU2e connection (HCPSLine03 card)
109

The following figure shows OTU2/OTU2e connections in HCPSLine08 card:

Figure 81: OTU2/OTU2e Connection (HCPSLine08 Card)
110


Figure 82: OTU2/OTU2e Connections (HCPSLine12 Card)
111


Figure 83: OTU2/OTU2e Connections (HCPSLine22 Card)
112


113

The following figure shows OTU2/OTU2e connection on HCPSLine26 card:

Figure 85: OTU2/OTU2e Connection- HCPSLine26 Card
114


Figure 86: OTU2/OTU2e Connection- HCPSLine27
115


116


11.1.8 Connect OTUC1/OTUC2 ports

The traffic is received and transmitted from the TJ1600 through OTUC1 and OTUC2 ports
available on port P1 on HCPSLine26, HCPSLine27, HCPSLine29, HCPSLine31,
HCPSLine32, HCPSLine33, and HCPSLine34 cards. The connectivity is made through LC
connectors.
Perform the following steps to connect LC connector cable to OTUC1/OTUC2 port:
2. Connect the LC connector cables securely to the OTUC1/OTUC2.
of the rack.
117

The following figure shows OTUC1/OTUC2 connection in HCPSLine26 card:

Figure 89: OTUC1/OTUC2 Connection- HCPSLine26 Card
118


Figure 90: OTUC1/OTUC2 Connection- HCPSLine27 card
119


Figure 91: OTUC1/OTUC2 Connection- HCPSLine29 card
120

The following figure shows OTUC1-OTUC6 connection in HCPSLine31 card:

Figure 92: OTUC1-OTUC6 Connection- HCPSLine31 Card
121


122


Figure 94: OTUC1-OTUC4 Connection- HCPSLine33 card

Figure 95: OTUC1-OTUC4 Connection - HCPSLine34 card

HCPSLine12, HCPSLine22, HCPSLine24, HCPSLine27, HCPSLine28 cards, HCPSLine31,
HCPSLine32, HCPSLine33, and HCPSLine34 cards. Before making port connection,
ensure that proper pluggable has been inserted on to the port.
Note: Ensure the screws on CFP are tightened before routing the cable.

2. Connect the LC connector cables securely to the on OTU4 port.
of the rack.
123

The following figure shows OTU4 connections in HCPSLine12 card:

Figure 96: OTU4 Connection - HCPSLine12 Card
124


125


Figure 98: OTU4 Connection (HCPSLine24 Card)
126

The following figure displays OTU4 connection in HCPSLine27 Card:

Figure 99: OTU4 Connection- HCPSLine27 Card
127


Figure 100: OTU4 Connection- Line28 Card
128


129


130


131


11.2 TJ1600-6
This section details the procedures for connecting cable to the optical ports on the cards
supported on TJ1600-6 chassis.

on HCPSLine08 and HCPSLine22 cards. The connectivity is made through LC connectors.
Before making port connection, ensure that proper SFP pluggable has been inserted on
to the port.
of the rack.
132


Figure 105: STM-1 connection: HCPSLine08 card

Figure 106: STM-1 connection- HCPSLine22 card
133


to the port.
of the rack.
134


135


to the port.
2. Connect the LC connector cable securely to the STM-16 interfaces of the card.
of the rack.
136


137



HCPSLine31 and HCPSLine33 cards. The connectivity is made through LC connectors.
Before making port connection, ensure that proper XFP pluggable has been inserted on
to the port.
of the rack.
138


139


140

141

The following figure shows STM-64 Connection in HCPSLine25 card:

Figure 114: STM-64 Connection - HCPSLine25 card
142

143

144

145

Figure 118: STM-64 Connection - HCPSLine33 Card

of the rack.
146

The following figure shows OTU1f ports on HCPSLine22 card:

Figure 119: OTU1f Connection -HCPSLine22 card

ports P3 to P10 of HCPSLine08 card. The connectivity is made through LC connectors.
to the port.
2. Connect the LC connector cable securely to the OTU1 ports of the card.
of the rack.
147


Figure 120: Connecting OTU1 ports- HCPSLine08 card

connectors. Before making port connection, ensure that proper XFP/SFP+ pluggable has
been inserted on to the ports.
of the rack.
148


Figure 121: OTU2/OTU2e connection- HCPSLine03 card

Figure 122: OTU2/OTU2e connection - HCPSLine08 card
149


150


151

Figure 125: OTU2/OTU2e Connection - HCPSLine25 card
152

153


154

Figure 128: OTU2/OTU2e connection (HCPSLine31 card)

155

HCPSLine32, HCPSLine33 and HCPSLine34 cards. The connectivity is made through LC

connectors.
1.Identify and label the LC connector cables.
2.Connect the LC connector cables securely to the OTUC1/OTUC2.
3.Route the cables through the cable routers securely along the left side or right side of
the rack.
Figure 129: OTUC1/OTUC2 Connection - HCPSLine26 Card
156


157

158

The following figure shows OTUC1 - OTUC6 connection in HCPSLine31 card:

159


160




HCPSLine12, HCPSLine22, HCPSLine24, HCPSLine27, HCPSLine28, HCPSLine31, and
HCPSLine32 cards. Before making port connection, ensure that proper pluggable has
NOTE: Ensure the screws on CFP are tightened before routing the cable.

2. Connect the LC connector cables securely to the on OTU4 port.
of the rack.
161

The following figure shows OTU4 ports on HCPSLine12 card:

Figure 136: OTU4 connection- HCPSLine12 card

Figure 137: OTU4 Connection- HCPSLine22 card
162


Figure 138: OTU4 Connection- HCPSLine24
163



164


165



Figure 143: OTU4 Connection - HCPSLine33 card
166


Figure 144: OTU4 Connection - HCPSLine34 card
11.3 TJ1600-2
This section details the procedures for connecting cable to the optical ports on the cards
supported on TJ1600-2 chassis.

to the port.
of the rack.
167

The following figure shows STM-1 ports on HCPSLine08 card:

Figure 145: Connecting STM-1 ports- HCPSLine08


The traffic is received and transmitted from the TJ1600 through STM-4 ports available in
HCPSLine08 and HCPSLine22 cards. The connectivity is made through LC connectors.
to the port.
of the rack.
168

The following figure shows STM-4 ports on HCPSLin08 card:



to the port.
2. Connect the LC connector cable securely to the STM-16 interfaces of the card.
of the rack.
169




HCPSLine25, HCPSLine26, HCPSLine27, HCPSLine31, and HCPSLine33 cards. The
connectivity is made through LC connectors. Before making port connection, make sure
that proper SFP+XFP pluggable has been inserted on to the port.
Do the following steps to connect LC connector cable to STM-64 port:
170

of the rack.

Note: The FEC on HCPSLine03 card is Tejas proprietary.
171



Figure 154: STM-64/OC-192 Connections (HCPSLine12 Card)



Figure 157: STM-64 Connection (HCPSLine25 card)
172

The following figure display STM-64 connection on HCPSLine26 card:

Figure 158: STM-64 Connection- HCPSLine26


173



of the rack.
174

The following figure shows OTU1f ports on HCPSLine22 card:

Figure 162: Connecting OTU1f ports- HCPSLine22

ports P3 to P10 of HCPSLine08 card. The connectivity is made through LC connectors.
to the port.
2. Connect the LC connector cable securely to the OTU1 ports of the card.
of the rack.
175


Figure 163: Connecting OTU1 ports- HCPSLine08 card

HCPSLine27, and HCPSLine31 cards. The connectivity is made through LC connectors.
of the rack.
176

The following figure shows OTU2/OTU2e ports on HCPSLine03 card:

Figure 164: OTU2/OTU2e Connection - HCPSLine03 card

Figure 165: OTU2/OTU2e Connection- HCPSLine08 card
177


Figure 166: Connecting OTU2/OTU2e ports- HCPSLine12

Figure 167: Connecting OTU2/OTU2e ports- HCPSLine22
178

The following figure shows OTU/OTU2e ports on HCPSLine25 card:

Figure 168: OTU2/OTU2e Connection- HCPSLine25 card

179



Figure 171: OTUC2/OTUC2e Connection- HCPSLine31 Card
180


Figure 172: OTUC2/OTUC2e Connection- HCPSLine33 Card

connectors.
2. Connect the LC connector cables securely to the OTUC1/OTUC2.
of the rack.
181



182



183

184



HCPSLine12, HCPSLine22, HCPSLine24, HCPSLine27,HCPSLine28, HCPSLine31,
185

HCPSLine32, HCPSLine33, and HCPSLine34 cards. Before making port connection,

ensure that proper pluggable has been inserted on to the port.
Note: Ensure the screws on CFP are tightened before routing the cable.
Perform the following steps for connecting cable to OTU4 port on cards:
2. Face towards front of the chassis, identify the chassis slot with the desired card and
port on the card where the cable has to be connected.
3. Connect the LC connector cables to the OTU4 port. Ensure that retention slide
operates to hold the connector in place.
4. Route the cable securely through the cable routers along left side or right side of
the rack depending on the position of card.
186

The following figure shows the OTU4 port connection on HCPSLine12 card:
Figure 181: Connecting OTU4 port- HCPSLine22 card
187

188

Figure 184: Connecting OTU4 ports- HCPSLine28
189

190

191

12 Connect Ethernet ports on cards
This chapter covers procedures for connecting cables to Ethernet ports on cards
supported in TJ1600 product family.
12.1 Connect ports on CEF-5 card

This section describes connecting 10GigE and GigE ports on CEF-5 card.
12.1.1 TJ1600-11
This topic details procedures for connecting 10GigE and GigE interfaces on CEF-5 card in
TJ1600-11 chassis.
12.1.1.1 Connect 10 Gbps optical interfaces

Before making interface connections, ensure that proper pluggable module has been
inserted on to the interface. To connect 10 Gbps optical interfaces, perform the following
steps:
2. Connect the LC connector cable securely to the interface on the card.
of the rack.
196

The following figure shows 10 Gbps optical interfaces on CEF-5 card:

Figure 189: 10G connections (CEF-5 Card)
197

Connect Ethernet ports on cards
The following figure shows 10 Gbps optical interfaces on HCPSLine31 card:

Figure 190: 10G Connections (Line-31 Card)
Note: When a CEF-5 card is jacked-in without any license present on the node, the
default port configuration supported is 2x10G. A license is required to be generated
during node commissioning to enable other 10G ports on CEF-5 card. For procedure
to enable this license feature, refer TJ1600 Product Family User Interface Guide.
12.1.1.2 Connect 1 Gbps optical and electrical interfaces

Before making port connection, make sure that proper SFP pluggable has been inserted
on to the port.
Perform the following steps to connect LC connector cable to the 1000BASE-X optical
port:
of the rack.
Perform the following steps to connect RJ-45 connector cable to the 10/100/1000 BASE-
TX electrical port:
1. Identify and label the RJ-45 connector cable.
of the rack.
198

The following figure shows 1000BASE-X Optical and 10/100/1000 BASE-TX Electrical
ports on CEF-5 card:
Figure 191: 1G Ports (CEF5 Card)
12.1.2 TJ1600-6
This topic details procedures for connecting 10GigE and GigE interfaces on CEF-5 card in
the TJ1600-6 chassis.
12.1.2.1 Connect 10 Gbps optical interfaces

The CEF-5 card supports 4x10G LAN over XFP interfaces on ports P1 to P4 and 4x10G
LAN over SFP+ on ports P13 to P16.
Perform the following steps for connecting cables to the 10 Gbps optical interfaces on
the CEF-5 card:
2. Identify the chassis slot with CEF-5 card and the port on the card where the cable
has to be connected. Ensure that appropriate XFP/SFP+ module is inserted into
that port.
3. Connect the cable to the LC connector securely. Ensure that the retention slide
199

4. Route the cables through the cable router/guide securely along the left side or right
side of the rack.
200

The following figure shows 10Gbps optical interfaces on CEF5 card:

Figure 192: 10Gbps optical interfaces on CEF5 card
201

The following figure shows 10Gbps optical interfaces on HCPSLine31 card:

Figure 193: 10Gbps optical interfaces on HCPSLine31 card
Note: When a CEF5 card is jacked-in without any license present on the node, the
default port configuration supported is 2x10G. A license is required to be generated
during node commissioning to enable other 10G ports on CEF5 card. To enable this
license feature, refer the document TJ1600 Product Family User Interface Guide.
12.1.2.2 Connect 1 Gbps optical and electrical interfaces

The CEF-5 card supports 8x1000BASE-X over SFP interfaces on ports P5 to P12 and
4x10/100/1000BASE-TX over RJ45 interfaces on ports P17 to P20.
Perform the following steps for connecting cables to the optical interfaces on CEF-5 card:
2. Identify the chassis slot with CEF-5 card and the interfaces on the card where the
cables have to be connected. Ensure that appropriate SFP module is inserted into
the optical ports.
side of the rack. Ensure that the retention slide operates to hold the connector in
place.
202

The following figure shows 1000BASE-X optical interface connections in CEF-5 card:
Figure 194: Connecting CEF-5 Card Interface- 1000BASE-X
Perform the following steps for connecting cables to the electrical interfaces on CEF-5
card:
2. Identify the chassis slot with CEF-5 card and the interfaces on the card where the
cables have to be connected.
3. Connect the cable to the RJ-45 connector securely.
side of the rack.
203

Following figure shows 4x10/100/1000BASE-TX electrical interface connections in

CEF-5 card:
Figure 195: Connecting CEF-5 Card Interface- 10/100/1000BASE-TX
12.2 Connect Ethernet ports on optical tributary

cards
This section describes connecting cables to 100GigE, 10GigE ports and GigE ports on
tributary cards in TJ1600-11, TJ1600-6, and TJ1600-2 chassis.
12.2.1 TJ1600-11
This section describes connecting Ethernet ports on the following cards in TJ1600-11
chassis:
• 100GE ports on HCPSLine12, HCPSLine22, HCPSLine24, HCPSLine27, and

HCPSLine28 cards
• 10GE ports on HCPSLine01, HCPSLine03, HCPSLine08, HCPSLine12, HCPSLine22,

HCPSLine25, HCPSLine26, and HCPSLine27 cards
• 1GE port on HCPULine01 and HCPSLine08 cards
• 40GE port on HCPSLine12 card

12.2.1.1 Connect 100 Gbps Optical Ports
The traffic is received and transmitted from the TJ1600 through 100GE port available on
204

HCPSLine12, HCPSLine22, HCPSLine24, HCPSLine27, and HCPSLine28 cards. Before

making port connection, ensure that proper CFP pluggable has been inserted on to the
port and the screws on CFP are tightened that are provided on CFP.
Perform the following steps to connect LC connector cable to 100 Gbps optical port:
2. Connect the LC connector cable securely to the CFP on 100GE port.
of the rack.
205

The following figure shows 100GE port on HCPSLine12 card:

Figure 196: 100Gbps Interface Connection- HCPSLine12 Card
206


Figure 197: 100G Connection (HCPSLine24 Card)
207


Figure 198: 100GE Interface Connection- HCPSLine27 Card
208


Figure 199: 100G connection - HCPSLine28 card

HCPSLine01, HCPSLine03, HCPSLine08, HCPSLine12, HCPSLine22, HCPSLine25,
HCPSLine26 and HCPSLine27 cards. Before making port connection, ensure that proper
pluggable module has been inserted on to the port.
of the rack.
209

The following figure shows 10 Gbps optical ports on HCPSLine01 card:

Figure 200: 10G connection (HCPSLine01 Card)
210


Figure 201: 10G connection (HCPSLine03 card)
211


212


213


214


Figure 205: 10G Connection (HCPSLine25 Card)
215

The following figure shows 10Gbps optical ports on HCPSLine26 card:

Figure 206: 10Gbps Inteface Connection- HCPSLine26 Card
216


Figure 207: 10Gbps interface connection- HCPSLine27 Card

HCPULine01 and HCPSLine08 cards. Before making port connection, make sure that
proper SFP pluggable has been inserted on to the port.
Perform the following steps to connect LC connector cable to 1000BASE-X optical port:
of the rack.
217

The following figure shows 1Gbps ports on HCPULine01 card:

Figure 208: Connecting 1GE interface on HCPULine01 card
218

The following figure shows 1Gbps ports on HCPSLine08 card:

Figure 209: 1Gbpsconnections (HCPSLine08 Card)
12.2.1.4 Connect 40GE Optical Port

HCPSLine12 cards. Before making port connection, make sure that proper CFP pluggable
has been inserted on to the port.
1. Perform the following steps to connect LC connector cable to 40GE optical port:
4. 3.Route the cable through the cable routers securely along the left side or right
side of the rack.
219

The following figure shows 40GE port connection on HCPSLine12 card:

Figure 210: 40GE interface connection
12.2.2 TJ1600-6
chassis:
• 100GE ports on HCPSLine12, HCPSLine24, HCPSLine27 and HCPSLine28 cards
• 10GigE ports on HCPSLine03, HCPSLine12, HCPSLine22, HCPSLine25, HCPSLine26

and HCPSLine27 cards.
• GigE ports on HCPSLine08 and HCPSLine22 cards
• 40GE ports on HCPSLine12 card
220


HCPSLine12, HCPSLine24, HCPSLine27 and HCPSLine28 cards. Before making port
connection, ensure that proper CFP pluggable has been inserted on to the port and the
screws on CFP are tightened that are provided on CFP.
2. Connect the LC connector cable securely to the CFP on 100GE port.
of the rack.
221



222



Figure 214: 100G connection (HCPSLine28 card)
223


HCPSLine03, HCPSLine12, HCPSLine22, HCPSLine25, HCPSLine26 and HCPSLine27
cards. Before making port connection, ensure that proper pluggable module has been
of the rack.
224


Figure 215: 10G Connection - HCPSLine03 card
225


226


227


228


Figure 219: 10Gbps interface connection- HCPSLine26 card
229

The following figure shows 10Gbps optical interface connection on HCPSLine27 card:

HCPSLine08, and HCPSLine22 cards. Before making port connection, make sure that
proper SFP pluggable has been inserted on to the port.
of the rack.
230


Figure 221: 1GE connection- HCPSLine08 card

231


Perform the following steps to connect LC connector cable to 40GE optical port:
of the rack.
232


Figure 223: 40GE interface connection- HCPSLine27 card
12.2.3 TJ1600-2
chassis:
• 100GE ports on HCPSLine12, HCPSLine24, HCPSLine27, and HCPSLine28 cards
• 10GigE ports on HCPSLine03, HCPSLine12, HCPSLine22, HCPSLine25,

HCPSLine26, and HCPSLine27 cards
• GigE ports on HCPSLine08 and HCPSLine22 cards
• 40GE port on HCPSLine12 card

12.2.3.1 Connect 100 Gbps optical ports
The traffic can be received and transmitted from TJ1600-2 system through 100GE
optical ports on HCPSLine12, HCPSLine24, HCPSLine27, and HCPSLine28 card. Before
making connection, ensure that proper pluggable module is inserted on to the port. The
connectivity is made through LC connectors.
Perform the following steps for connecting cable to 100 Gbps optical Ethernet port on
cards:
2. Face towards front of the chassis, identify the chassis slot with the desired card and
port on the card where the cable has to be connected.
3. Connect the LC connector cable to the 100GE port. Ensure that retention slide
233

4. Route the cable securely through the cable routers along left side or right side of
the rack depending on the position of card.
234

The following figure shows 100Gbps optical port on HCPSLine12 card:


235


Figure 227: 100Gbps ports- HCPSLine28 card

HCPSLine03, HCPSLine12, HCPSLine22, HCPSLine25, HCPSLine26 and HCPSLine27 card.
Before making port connection, ensure that proper pluggable module has been inserted
on to the port.
236

of the rack.
237



Figure 229: 10G connection- HCPSLine12 card
238



239




The traffic is received and transmitted from the TJ1600 through 1GE ports P3 to P18
available on HCPSLine08 card and 1GE ports P1 to P10 on HCPSLine22 card. Before
making port connection, ensure that proper SFP pluggable has been inserted on to the
port.
of the rack.
240




Perform the following steps to connect LC connector cable to 40GE optical port:
of the rack.
241


Figure 236: 40GE interface connection
242

243

13 Connect fiber channel ports on cards
This chapter covers procedures for connecting cables to fiber channel ports on cards
supported in TJ1600 product family.
13.1 TJ1600-11
This section details the procedures for connecting 8GFC/12GFC ports on HCPSLine12,
HCPSLine22, HCPSLine26, and HCPSLine27 card supported in TJ1600-11 chassis.
13.1.1 Connect 8GFC/12GFC ports

The traffic is received and transmitted from the TJ1600 through 8GFC/12GFC ports
available on HCPSLine12, HCPSLine22, HCPSLine25, HCPSLine26, and HCPSLine27
Perform the following steps to connect LC connector cable to 8GFC/12GFC ports:
3. Route the cable through the cable routers securely along the left or right side of the
rack.
244

The following figure shows 8GFC/12GFC ports on the HCPSLine12 card:

Figure 237: Connecting 8GFC/12GFC ports on HCPSLine12 card
245

Connect fiber channel ports on cards
The following figure shows 8GFC ports on HCPSLine22 card:

Figure 238: Connecting 8GFC ports on HCPSLine22 card
246


247

The following figure shows 8GFC/12GFC ports on HCPSLine25 card:

248

Connecting 8GFC/12GFC ports - HCPSLine26 card

249


13.1.2 Connect 16GFC ports

The traffic is received and transmitted from the TJ1600 through 16GFC ports available
on HCPSLine12, HCPSLine26, and HCPSLine27 cards. Before making port connection,
ensure that proper pluggable module has been inserted on to the port.
Perform the following steps to connect LC connector cable to 16GFC ports:
rack.
250


251


252



Perform the following steps to connect LC connector cable to 32GFC ports:
rack.
253


254


255


13.2 TJ1600-6
This section details the procedures for connecting 1GFC/2GFC and 8GFC/12GFC ports on
HCPSLine12, HCPSLine22, HCPSLine25, HCPSLine26, and HCPSLine27 card supported in
TJ1600-6 chassis.
13.2.1 Connect 1GFC/2GFC/4GFC ports

The traffic is received and transmitted from the TJ1600 through 1GFC/2GFC ports P1 to
P10 available on HCPSLine22 card. Before making port connection, ensure that proper
256

Perform the following steps to connect LC connector cable to 1GFC/2GFC port:

rack.

available on HCPSLine12, HCPSLine22, HCPSLine25, HCPSLine26, and HCPSLine27 cards
Before making port connection, ensure that proper pluggable module has been inserted
on to the port.
Perform the following steps to connect LC connector cable to 8GFC port:
rack.
257


258


259


The following figure shows 8GFC/12GFC port on HCPSLine26 card:
260

Figure 254: Connecting 8GFC/12GFC ports HCPSLine26 card
The following figure shows 8GFC/12GFC port on HCPSLine27 card:
261


rack.
262


263

The following figure shows 16GFC port on HCPSLine26 card:
264


265


rack.
266


267


268

13.3 TJ1600-2
This section details the procedures for connecting 1GFC/2GFC and 8GFC/12GFC ports on
HCPSLine12, HCPSLine22, HCPSLine26, and HCPSLine27 cards supported in TJ1600-2
chassis.
13.3.1 Connect 1GFC/2GFC/4GFC ports

The traffic is received and transmitted from the TJ1600 through 1GFC/2GFC/4GFC port
P1 to P10 available on HCPSLine22. Before making port connection, ensure that proper
Perform the following steps to connect LC connector cable to 1GFC/2GFC/4GFC port:
rack.
269

The following figure shows 1GFC/2GFC/4GFC ports on HCPSLine22 card:

Figure 262: Connecting 1GFC/2GFC/4GFC ports on HCPSLine22 card

available on HCPSLine12, HCPSLine22, HCPSLine25, HCPSLine26, and HCPSLine27
rack.
270



Figure 264: Connecting 8GFC/12GFC ports HCPSLine25 card
271


Figure 265: Connecting 8GFC ports on HCPSLine22

272


Figure 267: Connection 8GFC/12GFC ports on HCPSLine26 card

Figure 268: Connection 8GFC/12GFC ports on HCPSLine27 card

3. Route the cable through the cable routers securely along the left or right side of
the rack.
273



274



rack.
275



276


277

14 Connect ports on DWDM cards
This chapter covers procedures for installing optical adapter cards and connecting ports
on DWDM cards/units supported in TJ1600 product family.
For installing cards on the chassis, refer to installation procedure of that card/unit
RISK OF EYE INJURY: Avoid direct exposure to laser beam or fiber as

the invisible light can blind the person. Keep all unused optical connectors capped.
14.1 Install standalone units

This section covers the procedure for installing standalone units such as high power
Optical Fiber Amplifier (OFA), Power Splitter and Combiner Module (PSCM), Multiplexer
and Demultiplexer Unit (MDU40), and TJ1600-2 passive unit.
for the unit installation and cabling:
• Phillips screwdriver: To install the unit into the rack
• Four M6 mounting screws and four cage nuts
• Optical patch cords
• Cable ties
Rack-mounting the unit
Perform the following steps to install a standalone unit into the rack:
front side in the rack. For better cable management, ensure that the side chosen
for the unit is same as that of the node in the rack.
2. Determine the positioning of the unit in the rack and the rack holes to be used for
mounting. Ensure that 1RU space is available in the rack.
Note: TJ1600-2 passive unit requires 1.5RU height.
3. Do the suitable step of the following:

— If the rack holes are square and un-threaded, attach four cage nuts over the holes in
the rack post as shown in the following figure. Two cage nuts on rear side of the holes
on each rack post.
278

Figure 275: Install the cage nut on the rack post
4. Move the unit to the desired rack position.

5. Align the mounting holes (left and right) on front panel of the unit with mounting
holes in the rack.
6. Install four M6 screws (two on each rack post) through the holes on front panel of
unit, rack post, and into the cage nuts to secure the unit to the rack post.
For example, following figure shows the installation of the MDU40 unit to the rack:
Figure 276: Installation of MDU40 unit on rack
14.2 Install the optical adapter card

Optical adapter card HCPADP01 is used to split a slot in TJ1600 chassis to 2/3rd + 1/3rd
slots and HCPADP02 is used to split a slot in TJ1600 chassis to 1/2 + 1/2 slots. The
divided slots have backplane support to install the following cards:
279

Connect ports on DWDM cards
2/3RD SLOT
• Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit (MDU8)
• FPU01 with FPUADP01 adapter card

1/3RD SLOT
• FPU01
1/2 SLOT
• OADM1
• OADM4
• (Optical Power Monitoring) OPM
• Variable Optical Attenuator (VOA)
• Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR)
• Optical Time Domain Reflectometer Filter (OTDRF)

The following figure shows the installed adapter card on the chassis:
Figure 277: HCPADP01 with MDU-8 card
The following figure shows the installed FPUADP01 card with FPU01 housed in 2/3rd slot
of HCPADP01 on the chassis:
Figure 278: FPUADP01 with FPU01 card in 2/3rd slot of HCPADP01
The following figure shows HCPADP02 card with OADM card:

Figure 279: HCPADP02 card with OADM cards
280

Follow the formula to obtain the daughter card and further sub slot number:
Daughter card slot number = (TJ1600_START_SUBSLOT_ID) + (adpSlot-
1)*TJ1600_SUBSLOTS_PER_ADPCARD + subslot - 1)
TJ1600_START_SUBSLOT_ID = 30
TJ1600_SUBSLOTS_PER_ADPCARD = 5
subslot = 1 (This is constant)
The same formula applies for TJ1600-11/6/2 as well
The slot numbers details for daughter card is as follows:
Table 9: Slot number details
ADP card JI slot Daughter card

number slot number Next sub slot number
slot 1 30 31 32 33 34
slot 2 35 36 37 38 39
slot 3 40 41 42 43 44
slot 4 45 46 47 48 49
slot 7 60 61 62 63 64
slot 8 65 66 67 68 69
slot 9 70 71 72 73 74
slot 10 75 76 77 78 79
slot 11 80 81 82 83 84
14.3 Connect ports on OFA card

An Optical Fiber Amplifier (OFA) is a fiber optic device used to amplify optical
signals.There are various versions of OFAs which can be used for multichannel
amplification up to 96 channels.
Perform the following steps to connect the amplifier ports:
2. Identify the chassis slot with OFA card and the ports on the card where the cables
have to be connected.
3. Make the cable connections as follows:
— For amplifier port connection, identify the desired amplifier port on the card and
connect the LC connector cable to the Tx and Rx end of that port. Ensure that the
retention slide operates to hold the connector in place. Connect the other end of the
cable to the Rx and Tx of an optical port on a line card.
— For monitor port connection, connect the LC connector cable to the monitor port on OFA
card. Connect the other end of the cable to a power monitoring card/unit.
4. Route the cables securely through cable routers/guides along the left or right side
of the rack.
281

The following figure shows the amplifier and monitor ports on OFA card:
Figure 280: Optical fiber amplifier interfaces
14.4 Connect high power OFA ports

The OFA-C-S26-FG is a high power OFA standalone unit. On the front panel, there are
three ports namely Input, Output and Monitor. On the back panel, there are ports for
Ethernet, RS232 and Monitor ports.
Perform the following steps to connect the input and monitor ports on front panel of
OFA-C-S26-FG card:
2. Connect the cable to the LC connector ports and ensure that the retention slide
3. Route the cables through cable routers securely along the left or right side of the
rack.
Perform the following steps to connect the output port on front panel of OFA-C-S26-FG
card:
1. Identify and label the E-2000 UPC connector cable.
2. Connect the cable to the E-2000 UPC connector port and ensure that the retention
slide operates to hold the connector in place.
rack.
Perform the following steps to connect the Ethernet (LAN) and Monitor (External
Alarms) ports on the back panel:
1. Identify and label the Ethernet and monitor cable.
2. Connect the cable to the RJ-45 connector port on respective ports and ensure that
the retention slide operates to hold the connector in place.
3. Route the cable through cable routers securely along the left side or right side of
the rack.
282

Note: The LAN interface can be connected directly to the Element Management
Software (EMS) and the available NMS port on the system.
Perform the following steps to connect the RS232 interface on the back panel:
1. Identify and label the RS232 cable.
2. Connect the cable to the RS232 (RJ-45) connector port and ensure that the reten-
tion slide operates to hold the connector in place.
3. Route the cable through cable routers securely along the left or right side of the
rack.
The following figure shows the ports and the corresponding connector type to be used
for OFA-C-S26-FG card:
Figure 281: Ports and connector for OFA-C-S26-FG
To configure the IP address on high power OFA card, perform the following steps:
1. Connect the RS232 port on the back panel of the OFA-S26-FG card and PC terminal
with RS232 cable provided along with the system.
2. Select the port on the terminal.
3. Login and enter the login ID and password.
4. Enter the command set ipaddr<IP address>. The IP address of the amplifier and
the node connected to it must be in the same subnet.
14.5 Connect MDU8-D ports

The function of the MDU8-D is to add and drop 8 DWDM channels with 100GHz spacing.
One card supports multiplexing of 8 wavelengths in the transmit direction and
demultiplexing of 8 wavelengths in receive direction.
Perform the following steps to connect the MDU8-D ports:
2. Connect the cable to the LC connectors and ensure that the retention slide operates
to hold the connector in place.
rack.
283

The following figure shows the ports on MDU-8-D card:

Figure 282: Interface connection for MDU-8-D card
14.6 Connect MDU16-D ports

The function of the MDU16-D is to add and drop 16 DWDM channels with 100GHz
spacing. One card supports multiplexing of 16 wavelengths in the transmit direction and
de-multiplexing of 16 wavelengths in receive direction.
Perform the following steps to connect the MDU16-D ports:
rack.
284

The following figure shows the ports on MDU16-D card:

Figure 283: Interface connection for MDU-16-D card
14.7 Connect MDU40 ports

MDU40 is a 40 channel multiplexer and demultiplexer passive unit which does not
require electrical power to be operational. The unit is installed in a standalone mode,
requiring 1U of vertical space in a 19-inch sub-rack. It is used with TJ1600 platform for
aggregating multiple channels in the optical domain.
This section covers the connections for Add/Drop ports, Monitor port, and Common port
that have to be performed on a MDU40 unit.
285


Perform the following steps to connect cables to the ports on MDU40 unit:
1. Identify and label all the LC connector cables to be used.
— For Add/Drop port connection, identify the desired port/channel on MDU40 unit and
connect the LC connector cable to the Tx and the Rx of that port/channel. Ensure that
the retention slide operates to hold the connector in place. Connect the other end of the
cable to the Rx and Tx of the optical port on a line card as shown in the following figure.
Note that the optical port should have a tunable SFP/XFP which is tuned to appropriate
wavelength as that of port on MDU40 unit. If optical port has fixed DWDM XFP/SFP then
XFP channel number must match that of MDU port.
— For Monitor port connection, connect the LC connector cable to the Mux/Demux end of
the Monitor port on MDU40 unit. Connect the other end of the cable to a power
monitoring card/unit as shown in the following figure.
— For Common port connection, connect the LC connector cable to the Tx and the Rx of
Common port on MDU40 unit. Ensure that the retention slide operates to hold the
connector in place. Connect the other end of the cable to the Rx and Tx of a Common
port on another Multiplexer/demultiplexer unit as shown in the following figure:
Figure 284: Port connectivity diagram for MDU-40E-C-100G unit
3. While routing the cables, route through cable guides/routers securely along the left
side or right side of the rack for better cable management.
286

14.8 Connect CLMDU ports

The colourless Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Unit (CLMDU) allows to add or drop
wavelengths in optical domain, thus acting as a optical cross connect system between
multiple node elements.
Perform the following steps to connect the cables to the ports on MDU-16CL-C-50G
card:
3. Route the cables through cable routers securely along the left side or right side of
the rack.
The following figure shows the ports on MDU-16CL-C-50G card:
Figure 285: Connecting interfaces- MDU-16CL-C-50G
14.9 Connect MDU96 ports

MDU40 is a 96 channel multiplexer and demultiplexer passive unit which does not
require electrical power to be operational. The unit is installed in a standalone mode,
requiring 1U of vertical space in a 19-inch sub-rack. It is used with TJ1600 platform for
aggregating multiple channels in the optical domain.
287

This section covers the connections for Add/Drop ports, Monitor port, and Common port
that have to be performed on a MDU-96-C-50G unit.

Perform the following steps to connect cables to the ports on MDU96 unit:
1. Identify and label all the LC connector cables to be used.
— For Add/Drop port connection, identify the desired port/channel on MDU96 unit and
connect the LC connector cable to the Tx and the Rx of that port/channel. Ensure that
the retention slide operates to hold the connector in place. Connect the other end of the
cable to the Rx and Tx of the optical port on a line card as shown in the following figure.
Note that the optical port should have a tunable SFP/XFP which is tuned to appropriate
wavelength as that of port on MDU96 unit. If optical port has fixed DWDM XFP/SFP+
then XFP channel number must match that of MDU port.
— For Monitor port connection, connect the LC connector cable to the Mux/Demux end of
the Monitor port on MDU96 unit. Connect the other end of the cable to a power
monitoring card/unit as shown in the following figure.
— For Common port connection, connect the LC connector cable to the Tx and the Rx of
Common port on MDU96 unit. Ensure that the retention slide operates to hold the
connector in place.
288

Connect the other end of the cable to the Rx and Tx of a common port on another
Multiplexer/Demultiplexer unit as shown in the following figure:
Figure 286: Interface connection on MDU-96 card
3. While routing the cables, route through cable guides/routers securely along the left
side or right side of the rack for better cable management.
14.10 Connect OADM ports

The Optical Add Drop Multiplexer (OADM) is used to add-drop one or more new
wavelength channels in a DWDM network.
Perform the following steps to connect the cables to the OADM1 and OADM4 ports:
rack.
289

The following figure shows the ports on OADM-1 and OADM-4 cards:
Figure 287: Interface Connection- OADM-1 and OADM-4 cards
14.11 Connect ROADM ports

The Reconfigurable Optical Add Drop (ROADM) card can dynamically add drop any
wavelength up to 96 Channels from the same physical ports and hence provide
operational benefit compared to the fixed OADMs.
Perform the following steps to connect the cables to the ports on ROADM card:
rack.
290

The following figure shows the LC connection for ROADM-4-C-50G card:

Figure 288: Interface connection - ROADM-4-C-50G card
The following figure shows the LC connection for ROADM-8-C-50G card:

Figure 289: Interface connection- ROADM-8-C-50G
14.12 Connect OPM ports

The OPM card is used for measuring power. OPM-4-C-50G has four ports that measures
optical power from either 4 monitoring input ports (such as monitor port of OFA card).
Perform the following steps to connect the cables to the ports on OPM card:
291

rack.
The following figure shows the ports on OPM-4-C-50G cards:
Figure 290: Interface connection- OPM-C-4 and OPM-C-2 card
14.13 Connect optical PSCM ports

The optical Power Splitter Combiner Module (PSCM) splits the signal into N (N>1) parts
in one direction and combines N signals to produce one signal in other direction.
Perform the following steps to connect the cables to the optical ports on PSCM:
2. Connect the LC connector cable to the Tx and the Rx end of that port. Ensure that
rack.
292

The following figure shows the ports on 1x8 PSCM:

Figure 291: Interface connection- 1x5 PSCM
293


Figure 292: Interface connection- 1x2 PSCM
14.14 Connect OFM unit

The Optical Fiber Monitoring (OFM) uses OTDR to detect link degradation and faults over
user-defined spans and thresholds. It returns high-resolution fault location
measurements to the network operations center within minutes, which can be further
analyzed to pin point exact fault location.
To configure the IP address on OFM unit, perform the following steps:
1. Configure static IP for accessing OFM unit by connecting craft Ethernet port to a
host device.
2. Connect RJ-45 Ethernet cable between craft port of OFM unit and the PC.
3. Set the host device IPv4 address as 169.254.0.X (IP address which has the same
subnet of craft Ethernet IP address) with subnet mask of 255.255.0.0 and default
gateway of 169.254.0.1.
4. Ping IP 169.254.0.1 to confirm the connection establishment.
5. Open a terminal which support SSH session and connect to OTDR unit using com-
mand.
ssh –x superuser@169.254.0.1
6. Login to the device by typing default Username and Password.
— UserID: superuser
— Password: Sup%9User
To set or change a static IP address, enter the following series of commands:

1. Disable DHCP (if currently enabled) by entering:
— ip-service ipv4 config enable-dhcp false
2. Set a static ipv4 or ipv6 address by entering:
— ip-service config [ipv4] ip-address <address> <netmask>
3. Set the ipv4 or ipv6 gateway address by entering:
— ip-service config [ipv4] gateway-address <gateway>
4. Apply the changes by initiating a warm restart of the node by entering:
— reboot warm
5. The session closes as the node reboots. The node now has a static IP address.
294

14.15 Connecting VOA ports

TheVariable Optical Attenuator (VOA) is required in a DWDM network to adjust the
power levels in order to control the transmission performance.
Perform the following steps to connect the cables to the ports on VOA card:
1. Identify and label LC connector cables.
2. Connect the LC connector cable (carrying the signal for attenuation) to the Rx end
and the LC connector cable (with attenuated signal) to the Tx end of the port.
Ensure that the retention slide operates to hold the connector in place.
Note: Connect Rx cable first and then the Tx cable.
rack.
The following figure shows the ports on VOA-8-C card.
295

Figure 293: Interface Connection- VOA card
14.16 Connect ports on (FPU01/FPU02) card

The main function of the Fiber Protection Unit (FPU) is to protect against optical fiber line
failures.
Perform the following steps to connect the cables to the ports on Fiber Protection Unit
(FPU01/FPU02) card:
2. Connect the LC connector cable to the Tx and the Rx end of that port. Ensure that
rack.
296

The following figure shows the ports on FPU01 card:

Figure 294: Ports on FPU01 card
The following figure shows the ports on FPU02 card:

Figure 295: Ports on FPU02 card
14.17 Connect OSCF ports

The Optical Supervisory Channel Filter (OSCF) adds and drops the supervisory channel
wavelength primarily at the terminal, OADM, and intermediate line amplifier (ILA) sites
where the OFA are used.
Perform the following steps to connect the cables to the add drop module ports on
Optical Supervisory Channel Filter (OSCF):
297

rack.
298

The following figure shows the ports on OSCF-S51 card:

Figure 296: Interface connection- OSCF-S51
299

The following figure shows the ports on OSCF-D51 card:

Figure 297: Interface connection- OSCF-D51
14.18 Connecting DCM ports

The DCM (Dispersion Compensation Module) is used to compensate dispersion for optical
signals.
Perform the following steps to connect the cables to the ports on DCM:
rack.
300

Figure 298: Connecting DCM interfaces
The following figure shows a diagrammatic representation of port connectivity for two
DCM with a dual OSCF module and OSCF module with amplifier:
Figure 299: Port connectivity diagram for DCM with OSCF
14.19 Connecting OTDR ports

The Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) card is a half slot active card which
places an important role in real-time monitoring of fiber spans for faults, cuts, changes
in fiber quality and attenuation and so on.
Perform the following steps to connect the cables to the ports on OTDR:
rack.
The following figure shows the ports on OTDR-2 card:
301

Figure 300: Port connectivity of OTDR-2 card
302


303


14.20 Connecting OTDRF ports

The OTDR Filter (OTDRF) is a purely passive unit which is used in the node with the help
of the optical adaptor card and it can also be placed in the rack shelf. This occupies half
slot.
Perform the following steps to connect the cables to the ports on OTDRF filter:
3. Route the cables through cable routers securely along the left side or right side of
the rack.
304

The following figure shows the ports on OTDRF-2 card:

Figure 303: Port connectivity of OTDRF-2 card
305


306


14.21 Connecting 1625 coupling WDM ports

The 1625 coupling WDM card is used in the node with the help of OTDRF-H01 adaptor
card which is a 1RU sub-rack. Three 1625 coupling WDM cards can be inserted into a
single adaptor card.
Perform the following steps to connect the cables to the ports on 1625 coupling WDM:
rack.
307

The following figure shows the ports on 1625 coupling WDM card:
Figure 306: Port connectivity of 1625 coupling WDM card
14.22 Connecting C+L coupler CLF-S and CLF-D

The C+L coupler is used to multiplex and de-multiplex the C-band and L-band signals. It
has two C+L band filters for add and drop direction. The CLF card occupies a half slot in
the HCPADP02 card.
Perform the following steps to connect the cables to the C+L coupler that is CLF-S and
CLF-D.
1. Identify and label the cables used to multiplex and de-multiplex C and L-band
signals.
to hold the connector in place. It has two C+L band filters for add and drop direc-
tion. Card occupies ½ slot goes in ADP02 card.
rack.
308

Figure 307: Port connectivity of CLF-S
Figure 308: Port connectivity of CLF-D
309

15 Commission the node
This chapter describes the node commissioning procedures you must perform on a newly
installed node. The node commissioning is performed using the web user interface by
providing the commissioning data of the node. The commission and test report is used
to record the commissioning data of a node.
15.1 Configure parameters in SLAT page

Ethernet IP
Each node has a network management system (LAN/NMS) port which is a 10/100 Mbps
network interface controller (NIC) port. Ethernet IP is the IP address with which the
node communicates with the external world.
Subnet mask length
The subnet mask length is an optional parameter that corresponds to the Ethernet IP
address. The subnet is used to set the subnet mask parameters.
Note 1: The subnet mask for a point-to-point connection (that is, a direct Ethernet
connection between the WUI host and the node) should be set to 32.
Note 2: If there are any failures after the node is up and configured, the you still be
able to reach the node if it goes to the SLAT page.
Router ID
The node communicates in the network over the Embedded Communication Channel
(ECC), using the router ID. The node can be configured either as a gateway element
(interconnecting two networks) or a pass-through node.
Follow the steps before configuring the Ethernet IP, subnet mask, router ID, and rate on
the node:
1. Log into node WUI using the LAN/NMS port.
2. Ensure your PC is correctly connected to the node through the LAN/NMS port.
3. Ensure that you have the Ethernet IP address, router ID, sub net mask, and static
route IP of the node to be configured.
4. Ensure the PC is configured in the same LAN as the node.
Follow these steps to configure the node's Ethernet IP, subnet mask, router ID, and
rate:
1. Click Initialize Node Parameters. The Configure Slat Node page appears.
310

Figure 308: Configure slat node
2. Select the Mode as Main from the drop down.

3. Select the Shelf Id as 1 (Selected by default). The MAC address field displays the
MAC address of the chassis.
4. Click Submit. The Initialize Node Parameters page of TJ1600-2 appears as
Figure 309: Initialize node parameters- TJ1600 Type-2SR
Following figure shows the Initialize Node Parameters page of TJ1600-6:

Figure 310: Initialize node parameters - TJ1600-6
311

Commission the node
Following figure shows the Initialize Node Parameters page of TJ1600-11 with
HCPXCC04 (640G):
Figure 311: Initialize node parameters- TJ1600 Type-11SR with HCPXCC04 (640G)
Following figure shows the Initialize Node Parameters page of TJ1600-11 with
HCPXCC04 (900G):
Figure 312: Initialize node parameters- TJ1600 Type-11SR with HCPXCC04 (900G)
Following figure shows the Initialize Node Parameters page of TJ1600-11 with OSMC
card:
Figure 313: Initialize node parameters page of TJ1600-11 with OSMC card
5. Enter the node name in the Name field.

6. Enter the functional router ID of he network in the Router ID field.
7. In the Ethernet IP field, the IP address must be entered. The Ethernet IP of each
node in the network must be unique.
312

8. Perform one of the following:

— For TJ1600-2: Select Data Path Mode as SDH_OTN_DWDM/SONET_OTN, Node
ODUXC Capacity as ODUXC200G/ODUXC320G/ODUXC400G from the drop down
menu.
— For TJ1600-6: Select Data Path Mode as SDH_OTN_DWDM/SONET_OTN, Node
ODUXC Capacity as ODUXC200G/ODUXC320G/ODUXC400G, Node
Connections Mode as Higher Order and AU Mode as AU4.
— For TJ1600-11 with HCPXCC03: Select Data Path Mode as SDH, Node Connections
Mode as Higher Order and AU Mode as AU4.
— For TJ1600-11 with HCPXCC04 (640G): Select Data Path Mode as SDH, Node
— For TJ1600-11 with HCPXCC04 (900G): Select Data Path Mode as OTN, Node
— For TJ1600-11 chassis, to configure SONET mode with HCPXCC04, from the SLAT page
select Data Path Mode as SONET_OTN_DWDM, Node Connection Mode as
Higher Order and AU Mode as STS1.
— For TJ1600-11 with OSMC card: Select Data Path Mode as SDH_OTN_DWDM/
SONET_OTN_DWDM, Node Connections Mode as Higher Order and AU Mode as
AU4.
9. Select Multi Shelf Support as Enable from the drop-down menu.
10. Click Submit. A confirmation page appears.
11. Click Accept Valid Modifications. A node reboot warning appears.
Note 1: The node name can be alphabetic/numeric/alphanumeric consisting of 1-20

characters. Special characters can also be used, except space.
Note 2: The default router ID displayed is 192.168.1.254. The node IP is to be set
as 192.168.1.xxx, where xxx must be between 1 to 253. The last octet of the router
ID and Ethernet IP must not be provisioned as 0 and 255 as they are reserved
addresses and therefore should not be provisioned.
Note 3: The default Ethernet IP displayed is 192.168.1.254.
Note 4: The node reboots after the Ethernet IP, subnet mask, and the router ID are
entered. After the node is up, verify whether all the changes are reflected. If the
changes are not reflected correctly, contact your next level of support. The PC IP
configuration must be updated to ensure connectivity to the newly provisioned IP
address for the node. Software version appears in the description field of the default
WUI page. The software version is in the format x.y, where x is the major release
and y is the minor release.
313

Commission the node
15.2 Connect PC to LAN/NMS port of the node

Before connecting the PC to the LAN/NMS interface of the TJ1600-2 node, follow the
steps:
• Ensure that you have a PC and an Ethernet cable with an RJ-45 connector.
• Ensure that you have the node IP address information, if the node has already
been commissioned.
Note: After powering up the node you have to wait for few minutes for the node
software to be up. This time depends on the cross connect card being used. The
Status/Active LED indicates the up status of the node. The IP address of the PC
should be in the same IP subnet as that configured on the node. If the node is
getting commissioned for the first time then use any one of the following address for
PC based on the product:
* for TJ1600-2 and TJ1600-11, range must be from 192.168.1.249 to
192.168.1.253
* for TJ1600-6, range must be from 192.168.1.1 to 192.168.1.253
To connect the PC to the LAN/NMS interface of the node, follow the steps:
1. Connect the LAN/NMS port of the node and the PC terminal with an Ethernet cable
of RJ-45 connector type.
2. Configure the IP address of the PC to be in the same subnet as the node.
3. If the preceding steps fail, check whether that you have used correct cables.
Note: While connecting to an uncommissioned node, your PC IP address must be

192.168.1.xxx where xxx is between 1 and 253. While connecting to commissioned
node, your PC IP address must reside in the same subnet as the node. Also,
configure the PC subnet mask to match the node's subnet mask and the PC default
gateway must be in the same LAN/NMS gateway.
15.3 Connect PC to LNMS ports of the node

Before connecting the PC to the LNMS interface of the TJ1600-6 node, follow the steps:
• Ensure that you have a PC and an Ethernet cable with an RJ-45 connector.
• Ensure that you have the node IP address information, if the network element has
already been commissioned.
Note: After powering up the node, wait for few minutes for the node software to be
up. This time depends on the cross connect card being used. The Status/Active LED
indicates the up status of the node. The IP address of the PC should be in the same
IP subnet as that configured on the node. If the node is getting commissioned for
the 1st time then use any one of the following address for PC based on the product:
* for TJ1600-2 and TJ1600-11, range must be from 192.168.1.1 to 192.168.1.249
* for TJ1600-6, range must be from 192.168.1.1 to 192.168.1.253.
314

To connect the PC to the LNMS interface of the node:

1. Connect the LNMS port of the node and the PC terminal with an Ethernet cable of
RJ-45 connector type.
2. Configure the IP address of the PC to be in the same sub net as the node.
3. If the preceeding steps fail, check whether that you have used correct cables.
Note: While connecting to an uncommissioned node, your PC IP address must be

192.168.1.XXX where XXX is between 1 and 253. While connecting to commissioned
node, your PC IP address must reside in the same subnet as the node. Also,
configure the PC subnet mask to match the network element's subnet mask and the
PC default gateway must be in the same LNMS gateway.
15.4 Download software from SLAT page

System Line-up and Test (SLAT) is used for new configuration of the node.
Before downloading the software from SLAT page, ensure that you have:
• PC and an Ethernet crossover cable with RJ-45 connector.
• Node IP address information if the node is already been commissioned.

To download software from SLAT page, ensure the following:
1. Connect the laptop with static IP 192.168.1.x to the node so that, it can be
accessed.
2. Launch Mozilla 38.0.0/Microsoft Edge 108.0.1462.54/Google Chrome
108.0.5359.125 of the browser and enter the URL https://192.168.1.254 or http:/
/192.168.1.254:20080.
— Restore from a previous back up configuration.
— Initialize node parameters.
— Install the software to proceed.
3. Click Please install the software to proceed.
4. Select the following software download options:
— Deliver release from local machine.
— Deliver release from remote machine.
5. If local machine is selected, provide the path of the file.
6. If a remote machine is selected, provide the following:
— Username
— Password
— IP of remote machine
— FTP (optional)
— Directory
7. Click Submit. The new software is downloaded to the NE. On completing the down-
load, the system prompts you to initialize the node parameters such as Node
Name, Ethernet IP address, location, and Router ID.
On initializing the node parameters, node goes for warm reboot while the node is
rebooting the software initializes on the NE. Once the node is up, issue a service
disruptive reboot for the FPGAs to get programmed on the NE.
Note: After restoring the new database, the node requires a hard reboot for the new
configuration to take effect. You can verify the software version from the description
315

Commission the node
field of the default WUI page. The software version is in the format x.y, where x and
y represents major and minor release respectively.
15.5 Log into an uncommissioned node

Before logging into an uncommissioned node, ensure that the PC is connected to the
LAN/NMS port of the node through a crossover cable with RJ-45 connectors.
Note: Change the default username for the default user account on the node. The
default user account and password are widely known.
Follow the procedure to login to an uncommissioned node:

1. Launch Mozilla 38.0.0/Microsoft Edge 108.0.1462.54/Google Chrome
108.0.5359.125 of the browser and enter the URL https://192.168.1.254 or http:/
/192.168.1.254:20080. The default IP address of the LAN/NMS port is
192.168.1.XXX and can be changed.
Note: By default, http is disabled. It can be enabled from node UI under

Security menu. For more details, refer to TJ1600 Product Family User
Interface Guide.
2. If the node does not respond, check the physical connection. Otherwise, contact
your next level of support.
3. If the login screen appears, enter the default user id and password at the login
prompt:
— Default Username: tejas
— Default Password: j72e#05t
— Domain: Local
Note: Ensure the domain is always Local.
The navigation menu of the node appears. The node view is the default page of the WUI.
If the default page of the WUI does not appear or login failed, check whether the user id
and password entered are correct. The user ID and the password rules are as follows:
316

15.6 Set node date and time

Table 10: UserID and the Password Rules
Parameters Rules
Username • is unique.
• can be alphabetic/numeric/alphanumeric.
• supports special characters except space.
• supports up to 32 characters.
Password • is unique.
• is eight characters long only.
• can be alphabetic/numeric/alphanumeric.
• supports special characters except space.
Follow the steps to set the date and time of the node:
Setting date and time for a node

1. Click System Time in the navigation pane.
2. Click Set Time link. Set Node Time page appears.
3. Set date and time by selecting appropriate values from the drop-down menu.
4. Click Submit. The changes are applied and a confirmation message appears.
Setting time zone for a node

2. Click Set Time Zone link. Set Time Zone page appears.
3. Set the time zone by selecting appropriate value from the drop-down menu.
4. Click Submit.
5. The changes are applied and a confirmation message appears. In case the drop
down menu does not display the desired time zone, click Other Time Zones. The
Other Time Zones page appears.
6. Enter the name of the time zone, the offset value, Enable Day light saving
from drop down menu. Set the Day light saving time parameters as:
— Month
— Week
— Day
— Hour
— Minute
Setting time server for a node

2. Click Set Time Server link. Set Time Server page appears.
3. Enable the field NTP Client Enable.
4. Enter the IP address of the server from which the node is to derive the date and
time.
5. Select the Synchronization interval from the drop-down menu.
6. Click Submit. Changes are applied and a confirmation message appears.
Note: Set the timing server of stratum level to 14 or less than 10. The node does
not synchronize to the server if the stratum level is not within the specified range.
317

Commission the node
NTP servers provisioned may take five minutes to update current NTP server
parameter.
15.7 Verify the serial numbers of cards and

pluggable modules of the node
Follow the steps to verify the serial numbers of the chassis and the cards present in the
node:
1. Click Inventory in the navigation menu.
2. Click Node Inventory link. The Node Inventory page appears.
3. View the serial numbers of all the cards in the Node Inventory page.
4. Verify the serial numbers of all the cards with the shipment report.
5. Verify whether all the cards present in the chassis are listed with the correct infor-
mation in the WUI Inventory application.
6. Verify whether the Power LED is turned on with green color for all the cards.
15.8 Set node date and time

Follow the steps to set the date and time of the node:
Setting date and time for a node

2. Click Set Time link. Set Node Time page appears.
3. Set date and time by selecting appropriate values from the drop-down menu.
Setting time zone for a node

2. Click Set Time Zone link. Set Time Zone page appears.
3. Set the time zone by selecting appropriate value from the drop-down menu.
4. Click Submit.
5. The changes are applied and a confirmation message appears. In case the drop
down menu does not display the desired time zone, click Other Time Zones. The
Other Time Zones page appears.
6. Enter the name of the time zone, the offset value, Enable Day light saving from
drop down menu. Set the Day light saving time parameters as:
— Month
— Week
— Day
— Hour
— Minute
Setting time server for a node

2. Click Set Time Server link. Set Time Server page appears.
3. Enable the field NTP Client Enable.
318

4. Enter the IP address of the server from which the node is to derive the date and
time.
5. Select the Synchronization interval from the drop-down menu.
Note: Set the timing server of stratum level to 14 or less than 10. The node does
not synchronize to the server if the stratum level is not within the specified range.
NTP servers provisioned may take five minutes to update current NTP server
parameter.
15.9 Synchronization reference clock source for

the node
Follow the steps to nominate a synchronization reference clock source for the node:
1. Click Configuration in the navigation pane.
2. Click Synchronization > Nominate Timing Reference. The Nominate timing
references page appears.
3. Select the Clock Reference type for a node. Set the clock reference port and the
priority for the clock reference selected.
If the clock source is not nominated as expected, contact your next level of support.
15.10 Backup and restore node configuration

data
Before backing up or restoring the node configuration data, ensure that:
1. PC/Laptop is connected to the FTP server.
2. IP address of the source/destination for the restore or backup operation is correct.
3. Directory path from where the configuration file is restored from or saved to is cor-
rect.
4. Username and password of the FTP account is correct.
Note: If you have a Linux or Unix machine, enable the FTP server that comes along
with it. If you are using a Windows machine, you must install FTP server such as
3Cdaemon. The FTP server for Windows can be downloaded from the following
location: https://3cdaemon.updatestar.com/en for windows 32 bit.htm.
Follow the steps to backup the node configuration data:

1. Click Maintenance > Configuration Management > Backup Configuration in
the navigation menu. The Backup configuration page appears.
2. Enter the parameters specified in the Backup Configuration parameters table.
3. Click Submit.
4. Click Accept Valid Modifications. A confirmation page displaying the successful
completion of backup operation appears.
319

Commission the node
The following table describes the backup configuration parameters:

Table 11: Backup configuration parameters
Parameter Default Value Description
Configuratio Backup Parameter to select if the configuration is to be backed

n Operation Configuration to up to a remote machine or local machine.
Remote Machine • Backup configuration to a remote machine:
Configuration is backed up to a remote machine.
• Backup configuration in the local machine:
Configuration is backed up in the local machine.
User Name - The user name of the system where the backup
configuration should be saved.
Password - The password of the system on which the backup is to
be saved.
IP Address - The IP address of the system where the backup is to
be saved.
FTP Port - The FTP port number for establishing connection to
(optional) the system where the configuration backup is to be
saved.
Directory - The directory in which the configuration backup is to
be saved.
Follow the steps to restore node configuration data:

1. Click Maintenance > Configuration Management > Restore Configuration in
the navigation pane. The Restore configuration page appears.
2. Enter the parameters specified in the Restore Configuration parameters table.
3. Click Submit. You are connected to the PC from which you want to restore config-
uration. Locate the configuration file and click it. The configuration is restored on
the node.
4. Click Accept Valid Modifications. A confirmation page displaying the successful
completion of restore operation appears.
5. Click Commit for the restored configuration to take effect. The node goes for a
cold reboot and the restored configuration takes effect.
Note: The remote server must have an FTP server installed on it to carry out the
Restore configuration data command. For a Linux system, FTP server is inbuilt. For
Windows system, install any third party server such as 3Cdaemon server along with
the provided IIS server.
The following table describes the restore configuration parameters:
320

Table 12: Restore configuration parameters
Parameter Default value Description
Configuration Restore Parameter to select if the backup is available

Operation configuration from on a remote machine or local machine.
remote machine • Restore configuration from remote
machine: Configuration is restored from
remote machine.
• Restore configuration from local
machine: Configuration is restored from
the local machine.
User Name - The user name of the system where the
backup configuration is present.
Password - The password of the system on which the
backup is present.
IP Address - The IP address of the system where the
backup is present.
FTP Port - The FTP port number for establishing
(optional) connection with system having the
configuration backup.
Directory - The directory in which backup configuration
file is present.
Note: After committing the configuration, cold reboot the shelf. The node
configuration state appears at the bottom of the preview pane.
CAUTION: The restoration of configuration data of a node is service

disruptive. The new configuration data requires backup. Restoration could be done
from a system which has an FTP server.
321

16 General configuration
This appendix describes the general configuration procedures for TJ1600 product family.
16.1 Switch ON node and PC configuration

1. Switch ON the Node, and wait for 15 minutes for the node to completely come up
(before trying to ping or access the node through browser).
2. The Factory default IP address for the Multiplexer is 192.168.1.254.
3. Use a PC/Laptop and configure the PC/laptop as mentioned in the following:
— IP Address to: Replace your IP address in the 192.168.1.0 network.
— Subnet Mask to: 255.255.255.0.
4. Connect the PC to the LAN/NMS/LCT interface of the multiplexer using a cross RJ-
45 LAN/NMS cable.
16.2 Login to the system

Perform the following steps to login to the system:
1. Connect the Ethernet port of PC/Laptop to the LAN/NMS port of the node using a
cross cable. Use straight cable only, if both the node and PC/Laptop are connected
through Hub/Switch.
2. Open the Mozilla 38.0.0/Microsoft Edge 108.0.1462.54/Google Chrome
108.0.5359.125 in the Windows PC. Enter the address in the address space:
https://192.168.1.254 or http://192.168.1.254:20080.
Note: When logging in for first time, http login to the node is set as disable by
default. When enabled, user can access the node through both https (secure)
and http (insecure) login.
3. Log into the UI with following user name and password:

— User Name: tejas
— Password: j72e#05t
4. Configuration:
— Name: Enter the Name of the Site/Location.
» Acceptable Values: combination of alphabets/numeric/special characters.
» Value Range: 1-22.
— Router ID: Enter the Router ID (for example,192.168.254.1)
— Ethernet IP: Enter the Ethernet IP of the node (for example,192.168.1.254).
— Contact: Enter the contact details.
— Location: Enter the location name.
5. Submit changes and accept the modifications. The node goes for a soft reboot if
values of Ethernet IP and Router ID are changed and after 3 minutes, you can login
to the system. If you are connecting other vendor node to the local node, then set
the remote node with the router ID and Ethernet IP as follows:
— Router ID: Enter the Router ID (Ex: 192.168.254.2).
— Ethernet IP: Enter the Ethernet IP of the other vendor's node (Ex: 192.168.2.254).
Following figure illustrates PC connected to the node in a network:
322

Figure 314: PC Connected to the Node
16.3 Configure OSPF parameters

To configure OSPF parameters, do the following steps:
1. Click Configuration > DCN > OSPF in the navigation menu. OSPF parameters
configuration preview pane appears.
2. Enter relevant value in the Area text box.
3. Click Submit. A confirmation preview pane appears.
4. Click Accept Valid Modifications. A Successfully Modified message appears. The
OSPF area is configured with the required value.
16.4 Configuring VCG ports

To configure VCG ports, do the following steps:
1. Click Configuration > Facilities > VCG. The VCG interface configuration
preview pane appears.
2. Click the desired VCG. The Provisioning VCG Interface preview pane appears.
3. Select/Enter values referring to Provisioning VCG Parameters table.
4. Click Submit. A confirmation preview pane appears. Click Accept Valid Modifica-
tions. A Successfully Modified message appears.
323

General configuration
Table 13: Provisioning VCG Parameters
Parameter Description Default Acceptable

Value Values
Admin The administrative status of the port. Down • Up

• Down
Status • Up: Sets the port in service.
• Down: Sets the port out of service.
Alarm The alarm reporting status of the port. Report • Report

• No-Report
Reporting • Report: Reports alarms raised on
Status the port.
• No-Report: Alarms raised at the
port are not reported.
Alarm Reporting status for VCG is
provisionable for CEL-3 card only.
LCAS LCAS support on the VCG port. Enable • Enable

• Disable
Support • Enable: Traffic is not disrupted
when a cross connect in one of the
node is not functional.
• Disable: The entire VCG port goes
down when a single cross connect in
the port is not functional.
Framing The framing standards for Ethernet GFP-F GFP-F

over SDH as chosen while configuring
Type
the ETH card.
Maximum The maximum difference delay 50ms --

Differential allowed.
Delay (ms)
CRC Type The CRC type. The field is not CRC-32 --

configurable.
• CRC-16: Configures VCG for CRC-
16 type.
• CRC-32: Configures VCG for CRC-
32 type.
VCAT Indicates if the VC Group is provisioned Enable • Enable

• Disable
to enable or disable virtual
concatenation (VCAT).
• Enable: VCAT is enabled.
• Disable: VCAT is disabled.
Operating Granularity of the signals as chosen VC-4 • VC3

• VC4
Granularity while configuring the ETH card.
• VC12
324

Table 13: Provisioning VCG Parameters
Parameter Description Default Acceptable

Value Values
Payload FCS Adds FCS. Enable • Enable
• Disable
• Enable: Allows the addition of the
payload FCS as specified in GFP.
• Disable: Does not allow the
addition of payload FCS as specified
in GFP.
It is recommended to keep the Payload
FCS enabled.
Remove Removes channels with SD from VCAT. Disable --
channels
• Enable: Channels are removed
with SD
from a VCAT group when there is a
signal degrade on any of the TUs
related to the channels.
• Disable: Channels are not removed
from a VCAT group when there is a
signal degrade on any of the TUs
related to the channels.
Note: Remove Channels with

SD is applicable for TP01 cards
only.
VCG Circuit The identifier for the VCG. Tejas Up to 40

Networks alphanumeric
Identifier
characters
Number of The number of channels configured for 0 (0 Mbps) --
Channels the group. Parameter not configurable.
Ignore RDI Ignores the extra RDI generated by Disable • Enable
in LFE Ethernet cards in a uni-directional • Disable
protection scheme.
Remove Removes channels with high differential Enable • Enable
Channel with delay. • Disable
MND
16.5 Add new VC To VCG

To add new VC to VCG, perform the following steps:
1. Click Configuration > Facilities > VCG. The VCG interface configuration page
appears.
2. Click VCG to be configured. Provisioning VCG Interface page appears.
325

3. Click Add new VC. Add VC to VCG page appears. Configure the following param-
eters:
— Number of connections: Enter the number of VCs to be created.
— Working Port: select a work port and corresponding K, L, M values
— Reversion Mode: Non-Revertive / Revertive
The default value is Non-Revertive. The options Revertive and Non-Revertive are
available when protection is enabled.
— WTR Time: Select value when Revertive is selected for Reversion Mode.
— Protection type on network: No Protection/50 ms Protection/Slow Protection
5. Click Accept Valid Modifications. A Successfully Modified message appears.
16.6 Configure STM port

Do the following steps to Configure STM Interface:
1. Click Configuration > Facilities > STM in the navigation pane. The Port_SDH
interface configuration preview pane appears.
2. Click the desired STMn port link. The corresponding Provision interface - STMn-
1-<slot no.>-<port no.> preview pane appears.
3. Select or enter the value for desired editable parameters. Refer to Provision inter-
face- STM parameters table for parameter description, the default and acceptable
values supported.
4. Click Submit. A confirmation message appears.
5. Click Accept Valid Modifications. A Successfully Modified message appears
under the Warnings field.
— A Back link directs you to Provision interface preview pane of the same interface.
326

Table 14: Provision interface- STM parameters
Parameter Description Default Acceptable Value

Value
Admin Status Allows you to select the Up • Up

• Down
administrative status of the
interface.
• Up: Sets the interface in
service.
• Down: Sets the interface
out of service.
Alarm Allows you to select the alarm Report • Report

• No-Report
Reporting reporting status of the
Status interface.
• Report: Reports alarms
raised on STM interface on
Active alarms pane.
• No-Report: Reports alarms
raised on STM interface on
Suppressed alarms pane.
STM Port Allows you to select the STM Internal-NNI • Internal NNI
• External NNI
Profile port profile.
Timing Allows you to enable or disable No Timing- • No Timing-

Transparent-
Transparent Timing Transparent Mode Transparent-
Mapping
Mode (TTM) on a client side port. Mapping • Timing-Transparent-
• No Timing-Transparent- Mapped to ODU
Mapping: Indicates that
TTM is disabled on the STM
interface.
• Timing-Transparent-
Mapped to ODU: Indicates
that TTM is enabled on the
STM interface. The client
signals can now be mapped
into OTU transport frames.
Mapping Allows you to select the Mapping Not • Mapping Not

Applicable
Type mapping type from the drop Applicable
• AMP Mapping
down list. • BMP Mapping
Note: In case of TTM

enabled STM-64 port,
only 'AMP Mapping' is
supported.
327


Value
Line Coding Displays the type of line coding -- --

being used (NRZ coding). This
field is not configurable.
Laser Displays the laser being used. -- --

Click the link to view the Laser
details. For more information,
refer to Viewing Laser Details.
The laser details are displayed
when a SFP/XFP module is
physically present on the port
and also when the SFP/XFP
image is present, except few
parameters.
ECC Byte Displays the established -- --

Selection Embedded Communication
Channel on the interface as:
• ecc_disable
• ecc_F1
• ecc_DCC_M/ecc_LDCC
• ecc_DCC_R/ecc_SDCC
• ecc_DCC_RM
• ecc_DCC_HB_MBPS
This field is not configurable.
Transmit J0 Allows you to enter the abcdabcdabcd Any alphanumeric value

Regenerator Section/Section abc
trace message to be
transmitted. Maximum length
is as specified by the Transmit
J0 Length and padded with
spaces for strings less than
specified length.
Transmit J0 Allows you to select the 16 • 1

• 16
Length transmit length of Regenerator
Section/Section trace.
Expected J0 Allows you to enter the abcdabcdabcd Any alphanumeric value

expected received Regenerator abc
Section/Section trace value.
328


Value
Expected J0 Allows you to select the length 16 • 1

• 16
Length of the expected received
Regenerator Section/Section
trace message.
Received J0 Displays the received -- --

Regenerator Section/Section
trace message.
TIM Action TIM Action settings control tim-ignore • tim_report

• tim_ignore
handling of mismatches
• tim_downstream_ais
between received and expected
trace messages. Allows you to
select the action taken on trace
identifier match as:
• tim_report: Reports trace
identifier mismatch, not
traffic affecting.
• tim_ignore: Does not
report trace identifier
mismatch.
• tim_downstream_ais:
Reports trace identifier
mismatch and sends Alarm
Indication Signal (AIS)
downstream, which is traffic
affecting.
Signal Fail Allows you to enable or disable Disable • 1e-3

• 1e-4
BER Signal Fail BER thresholds.
• 1e-5
Threshold • Enable: Enables selecting • Disable
(B2) the threshold, on crossing,
which Signal Fail alarm is
raised for errors detected by
B2.
• Disable: Signal Fail BER
Thresholds are disabled.
329


Value
Signal Allows you to enable or disable Disable • 1e-5

• 1e-6
Degrade BER Signal Degrade BER thresholds.
• 1e-7
Threshold • Enable: Enables selecting • 1e-8
(B2) the threshold, on crossing, • 1e-9
which Signal Degrade alarm • Disable
is raised for errors detected
B2.
• Disable: Signal Degrade
BER Thresholds are
disabled.
Threshold • Parameter to enable TCA Disable • Enable

(Threshold Crossing Alerts) • Default
(for TCA-
for 15 minutes duration. • Disable
15min) • Enable: TCA is user
configured for 15 minutes
interval. If this field is
enabled, an alert/event is
raised on Performance
Monitoring counts crossing
the threshold value. The
thresholds are changed
from the TCA Settings for
15-min duration link on
same page.
• Disable: TCA are disabled.
• Default: Default values for
the thresholds are used.
Threshold Parameter to enable TCA for 1 Disable • Enable

• Default
(for TCA- day duration.
• Disable
1Day) • Enable: TCA is user
configured for 1 day
interval. If this field is
enabled, an alert/event is
raised on Performance
Monitoring counts crossing
the threshold value. The
thresholds are changed
from the TCA Settings for
1-day duration link on
same page.
• Disable: TCA are disabled.
• Default: Default values for
the thresholds are used.
330


Value
Link Bundling Allows you to enable or disable Disable • Disable

link bundling on the port. • Enable
In case of multiple paths
between two nodes and link
bundling enabled on all the
links, protocols namely OSPF-
TE, RSVP, and CSPF are
enabled and the related
information are shared through
a single Bundled Interface
created. In essence, only one
adjacency shall be created with
that neighbor using any non-
faulty link.
Identifier Allows you to enter the name -- Alphanumeric

(identity) for the STM port. characters
Unreserved Bandwidth
Priority Displays the priority for VC. -- --
VC4 Displays the number of

unreserved VC4 channels.
VC4_4c Displays the number of

unreserved VC4_4c channels.
VC4_16c Displays the number of

VC4_64c Displays the number of -- --

Miscellaneous
Operate on Allows you to select/unselect --

All AUGs the check box for bulk Note: This
parameter is
enabling/disabling of AUGs. not applicable if
TTM is enabled
on a provided
port.
331


Value
All AUGs Allows you to enable (AU4) or Disable • AU4

• Disable
Mapping disable AUG mapping for all the
Structure AUGs on the STM port. This
parameter is editable when
Operate on All AUGs check
box is selected.
For TTM enabled ports, the
value is set to 99 by default.
16.7 Configure Ethernet interfaces

Do the following steps to configure Ethernet port:
1. Click Configuration > Facilities > Ethernet in the navigation menu. Ethernet
interface configuration preview pane appears.
2. Click the intended Ethernet interface. Input the following parameters:
— Admin Status: Up
— Alarm Reporting Status: Report
— MTU: Maximum size of a packet that can be sent through the interface. The default
value is 9600.
— Auto Negotiation: Enable or Disable depending on end equipment configuration.
— Flow Control: Allows the user to select the type of flow control on the Ethernet
interface.
— Threshold Enable for 15 min Interval: Disable/Enable
— LAN Circuit Identifier: User dependent /Convenient
— LACP: Enable
3. Click the intended Ethernet interface.
5. Click Accept Valid Modifications. A Successfully Modified message appears.
Repeat the earlier mentioned steps to configure the more Ethernet interface.
16.8 Configure timing manager

To configure timing manager:
1. Click Configuration > Synchronization > Synchronization Status in the
navigation menu and change QL Mode to Enabled. To configure the parameters,
refer to TJ1600 Product Family User Interface Guide:
— QL Mode
— Output QL mode
— reversion mode
— WTR time
— output QL
— min QL
Click Submit.
2. Click Nominate timing reference. Provide the second reference source and
assign the second priority to it.
332

Select a value from the drop-down menu for the following parameters.
— Clock Reference
— Clock reference Port
— Priority
3. Click View Nominated timing reference to verify the nominated clock. Repeat
the preceeding steps to nominate more than one clock source.
16.9 Check alarms

Do the following to check the alarms:
• To view alarms that are currently active on the node, click Faults > Active
Alarms in the navigation pane.
• To view all the alarms suppressed on the node, click Faults > Suppressed
Alarms in the navigation pane.
• To provision new alarm filters, click Faults > Alarm Filters in the navigation
pane.
• To provision the alarm history, click Faults > Event history in the navigation
pane.
• To view and change the severity of alarms, click Faults > Alarm Severity in the
navigation pane. After the change in severity, an asterisk appears before the alarm
name.
333

17 Multi shelf configuration
17.1 Physical connectivity
Additional LAN interfaces are provided in the OAM card for connecting main and
subtended chassis. In case of TJ1600-6 chassis, the NMS1 and NMS2 ports of
HCPOAM03 card in main chassis can be connected to other subtended chassis using two
RJ-45 cables. The subtended chassis can connect to other subtended chassis thus
supporting a linear or ring form of multi shelf arrangement.
Follow the procedure for connecting the main and the subtended chassis in TJ1600-6:
2. On main chassis, connect one end of the cable to RJ-45 connector on NMS1 port of
HCPOAM03 card and the other end of the cable to either NMS1/NMS2 port (RJ-45
connector) of first subtended chassis.
3. Similarly, connect a cable to RJ-45 connector on NMS2 port of HCPOAM03 card on
Main chassis and the other end of the cable to either NMS1/NMS2 port (RJ-45 con-
nector) of second subtended chassis.
4. Route the NMS cables through the cable routers securely along the left side or right
side of the rack.
5. The two subtended chassis connected to main can be connected to other slave
chassis using the unused NMS1/NMS2 port of connected subtended chassis.
335

Following figure shows the multi shelf connection between main and subtended.
Figure 315: Multi shelf connection between main and subtended
Note: For TJ1600-11, MGN1 and MGN2 interfaces are available on HCPOAM01 card
for multi-shelf connectivity. For TJ1600-2, P1 and P4 interfaces are available on
OAMC card for multi-shelf connectivity.
17.2 Configure subtended shelf from SLAT page

Subtended shelf is configurable from SLAT page when the multi shelf option is enabled
on the main shelf configuration.
Ensure the LAN cable is physically connected between main and subtended shelf.
336

Perform the following steps to configure the subtended shelf:

1. Pre-configure the Slave shelf Id is in the main shelf UI. For more details, refer to
TJ1600 Product Family User Interface Guide.
2. On Configure Slat Node page, select the Mode as Subtended Shelf from the
drop down.
3. Enter the subtended shelf id same as pre-configured from main shelf UI.
Figure 316: Configure Slat page - subtended shelf

5. Click Accept Valid Modifications. A node reboot warning appears.
337

18 System test procedures
This chapter covers the system level testing procedure to perform on the cards
supported on the node.
18.1 Testing HCPULine01 Card

This procedure helps you to perform the traffic interface testing on HCPULine01 card.
18.1.1 Before you start

Take the following precautionary measures:
• Ensure that all the optical connectors are clean. Refer to Guidelines for cleaning
optical fiber connectors.
• Ensure that you have an adequate number of optical patch cords.
RISK OF DAMAGE TO CARDS: Electrostatic discharge can damage

electrostatic sensitive devices. Ensure that you are wearing the anti-static strap
connected to the ESD location on the node.

18.1.2 Procedure for testing STM-1/4/16 interfaces

Perform the following steps for testing traffic on STM-1/4/16 interfaces of HCPULine01
card:
Note: With HCPXCC03 and HCPXCC04 cross connect cards, all 20 ports of
HCPULine01 card supports STM-1/4 rate while STM-16 is supported only on ports 1,
5, 6, 10, 11, 15, 16, and 20.
1. Insert a working cross connect card in supported slot.

2. Insert a working HCPULine01 card in supported slot.
3. Log in to the node WUI and configure the card in Reconfigurable mode.
4. Connect the transmit (Tx) and the receive (Rx) of Test Set to the Rx and Tx of port
P1 respectively on HCPULine01 card. Connect the Tx and Rx of port P2 to Rx and Tx
of port P4 respectively. Similarly, connect ports P3 and P5, P6 and P8, P7 and P9,
338

P10 and P12, P11 and P13, P14 and P16, P15 and P17, P18 and P19. Provide a
physical loopback on the port P20.
An illustrative diagram for the setup is as follows.

Figure 317: Setup for testing STM-1/4 interfaces
Note: For testing STM-16 capacity ports, connect the Test Set to P1 and
provide the loopback on P20. For remaining ports, connect optical cables
between P5 and P6, P10 and P11, P15 and P16.
5. In the node UI, perform the following steps:

a. Do the suitable step of the following:
— To test STM-1/4 capacity, set all interfaces to STM-1/4 capacity. Go to Inventory >
Node Inventory in the navigation pane on the node GUI and click the Slot number link
corresponding to HCPULine01 card. HCPULine01 Port Group Card page appears.
Click PortGroups link and configure all four Port Groups in 5xSTM-1/4 configuration.
— To test STM-16 capacity, set the supported port to STM-16 capacity. Go to Inventory >
Node Inventory in the navigation pane on the node GUI and click the Slot number
link corresponding to HCPULine01 card.The HCPULine01 Port Group Card page
appears. Click PortGroups link and configure all four Port Groups in 2xSTM-16
configuration.
b. Go to Configuration > Cross-Connect. The Configure Cross-connects
page appears. Click Add Cross-connect and provision a cross connect of VC4
capacity with Source Port as STM-1/4 port P1 and Destination Port as STM-1/4
339

port P2. Similarly, create other cross connects as mentioned in the following
Cross-connects provisioning table.
Table 15: Cross connects provisioning
Port capacity Cross connects on ports

STM-1/4 P1 and P2
P3 and P4
P5 and P6
P7 and P8
P9 and P10
P11 and P12
P13 and P14
P15 and P16
P17 and P18
P19 and P20
STM-16 P1 and P5
P6 and P10
P11 and P15
P16 and P20
6. Feed and monitor the STM-1/4/16 traffic from the Test Set to the HCPULine01 card.
Verify that no packets are lost.
7. Record the result in Test Performance for HCPULine01 card. The result verifies that
all the optical ports are functioning correctly.
18.1.3 Procedure for testing GIGE interfaces of

HCPULine01 in EoS mode
2. Insert a working HCPULine01 and HCPSLine01 card in supported slots.
3. Connect Ethernet test set to port P1 of HCPULine01 card. The test set up is as
shown in the following figure Setup for Testing HCPULine01 - GIGE Ports in EoS
Mode.
4. Connect optical cables between P2-P3, P4-P6, P7-P8, P9-P11, P12-P13, P14-P16,
P17-P18, and terminal loopback for P19 of HCPULine01 card.
5. Connect optical cables between ports STM-P1 and STM-P2 of HCPSLine01 card.
340

Figure 318: Setup for Testing HCPULine01 - GIGE Ports in EoS Mode
6. Set the supported port groups of HCPULine01 to 4xGIGE capacity. Go to Inven-

tory > Node Inventory in the navigation pane on the node GUI and Click the Slot
number link corresponding to HCPULine01 card. The HCPULine01 Port Group
Card page appears. Click PortGroups link and configure all four Port Groups in
4xGIGE configuration.
7. Perform port admin-up for the following ports of HCPULine01 card: P1, P2, P3, P4,
P6, P7, P8, P9, P11, P12, P13, P14, P16, P17, P18, and P19.
8. Perform port admin-up for the following ports of HCPSLine01 Card: STM-P1 and
STM-P2.
9. Add VC's of port STM-P1 and STM-P2 of HCPSLine01 card to the respective port
VCG group. To configure and provision VCG ports refer to Configuring VCG ports
and Add new VC To VCG. The following table gives the VCG association with the
port STM-P1 and STM-P2 of HCPSLine01 card.
10. Feed and monitor the Ethernet traffic from the Test Set to the HCPULine01 card.
Verify that the no packets are lost.
11. Record the result in Test Performance for HCPULine01 card. The result veri-
fies that all the optical ports are functioning correctly.
Table 16: VCG Association
Port Number VCG STM#
P1 101 1 (P1)
P2 102 1 (P2)
P3 103 2 (P1)
P4 104 2 (P2)
341

Table 16: VCG Association
Port Number VCG STM#
P6 106 3 (P1)
P7 107 3 (P2)
P8 108 4 (P1)
P9 109 4 (P2)
P11 111 5 (P1)
P12 112 5 (P2)
P13 113 6 (P1)
P14 114 6 (P2)
P16 116 7 (P1)
P17 117 7 (P2)
P18 118 8 (P1)
P19 119 8 (P2)
Table 17: Test Performance - HCPULine01 Card
Port Result
Number
STM-1 STM-4 STM-16 GIGE
P1
P2 Not Applicable
P3 Not Applicable
P4 Not Applicable
P5 Not Applicable
P6
P7 Not Applicable
P8 Not Applicable
P9 Not Applicable
P10 Not Applicable
P11
P12 Not Applicable
P13 Not Applicable
P14 Not Applicable
P15 Not Applicable
342

Table 17: Test Performance - HCPULine01 Card
Port Result
Number
STM-1 STM-4 STM-16 GIGE
P16
P17 Not Applicable
P18 Not Applicable
P19 Not Applicable
P20 Not Applicable
18.2 Testing HCPSLine01 Card

This procedure helps you to perform the testing traffic on interfaces of HCPSLine01.


electrostatic sensitive devices. Ensure that you are wearing the antistatic strap

18.2.2 Procedure for testing STM-64 interfaces

2. Insert a working HCPSLine01 card in supported slot.
3. Connect test set to port P1. The test set up is as shown in the following figure:
4. Connect terminal loopback at port P2 of HCPSLine01 card.
343

Figure 319: Setup for testing STM-64 interfaces
5. In the node UI,

a. Go to Inventory > Node Inventory in the navigation pane and click the Slot
number link corresponding to HCPSLine01 card. The HCPSLine01 Aggregate
Card page appears. Click Configure STM64/Ethernet mode link and select
the port configuration as 2xSTM-64.
b. Admin-up the interfaces P1 and P2 of HCPSLine01 card.
c. Create a cross connect between interface P1 and P2 of VC4_64C capacity. Go to
Configuration > Cross-Connect, the configure cross-connects page appears.
Click Add Cross-connect and provision a cross connect of VC4_64c capacity
with source port as P1 and destination port as P2.
6. Feed and monitor the STM-64 traffic from the Test Set to the HCPSLine01 card.
Verify that the no frames are lost.
7. Record the result in Test Performance - HCPSLine01 card. The result verifies
that all the optical ports are functioning correctly.
Table 18: Test Performance - HCPSLine01 Card
Port Number Result
P1
P2
18.2.3 Procedure for testing in EoS mode

3. Connect test set to port P1. The test set up is as shown in the following figure.
4. Connect terminal loopback at port P2 of HCPSLine01 card.
344

Figure 320: Setup for testing in EoS mode
5. In the node UI,

a. Go to Inventory > Node Inventory in the navigation pane and click the slot
Card page appears. Click Configure STM64/Ethernet mode link and select
the port configuration as 1x10GIGE + 1xSTM-64.
b. Admin-up the interfaces P1 and P2 of HCPSLine01 Card.
c. Add VC's of interface P2 to the interface P1 VCG group (VCG1-<slot number>-
101). To configure and provision VCG interfaces refer Configuring VCG Ports and
Adding New VC To VCG.
6. Feed and monitor the Ethernet traffic from the Test Set to the HCPSLine01 card.
Verify that the no packets are lost.
7. Record the result in Test Performance for HCPSLine01 card. The result verifies
Table 19: Test Performance - HCPSLine01 Card
Port Number Result
P1
P2
18.3 Test HCPSLine03 card

This procedure helps you perform the testing traffic on interfaces of HCPSLine03 card.

345



18.3.2 Procedure for testing in SDH GATEWAY card mode

3. Connect the Test Set to the port P1 of HCPSLine03 card as shown in the set up.
4. Connect optical fiber between ports P3 and P4.
5. Connect Loopback at port P2.
The overall setup diagram is as follows:

Figure 321: Setup for testing in SDH Gateway/SDH FEC mode
346

a. Configure HCPSLine03 in SDH GATEWAY Card mode.
Go to Inventory > Node Inventory in the navigation pane and Click the Slot
number link corresponding to HCPSLine03 card.The HCPSLine03 Aggregate
Card page appears. Click Configure Card and select Card Configuration as
SDH GATEWAY Card or SDH FEC Card from the drop down menu.
Note: If the card configuration is selected as SDH FEC Card, then enable FEC
on ports.
b. Admin-up the interfaces on HCPSLine03 Card.

c. Provision cross-connects between interfaces P1 and P3, between interfaces P2
and P4.
Go to Configuration > Cross-Connect, the Configure Cross-connects page

appears. Click Add Cross-connect and provision a cross connect of VC4_64c
capacity with Source Port as P1 and Destination Port as P3. Similarly, create other
cross-connects of VC4_64c capacity with Source Port as P2 and Destination Port as
P4.
7. Feed the STM-64 traffic from the Test Set to interface P1 on HCPSLine03 card.
8. Monitor the traffic on Test Set and verify that there are no frame drops in the traffic
feed.
9. Record the result in Test Performance- HCPSLine03 card. The result verifies
18.3.3 Testing Procedure in OTN FlexiCard Mode

Follow this procedure to test the HCPSLine03 card:
3. Connect the test set to the port P1.
4. Loopback at port P2.
5. Connect optical fiber cables between ports, P3 and P4.
347

The overall setup is shown in the following diagram.

Figure 322: Setup for Testing HCPSLine03 Card in OTN FlexiCard Mode
6. In the node UI, go to Inventory > Node Inventory in the navigation pane and
Click the Slot number link corresponding to HCPSLine03 card, HCPSLine03
Aggregate Card page appears. Perform the following steps on this page:
— Configure card in OTN FlexiCard mode. Click Configure Card and select OTN
FlexiCard under the drop down menu of Card Configuration. Click Submit and
accept modifications.
— Configure ports P1 and P2 to STM-64 and ports P3 and P4 to OTU2. Click Ports
Configuration and select the desired port configuration for each port. Click Submit
and accept modifications.
— Configure the ports P1 and P2 in Timing-Transparent-Mapped to ODU. Click Ports,
and Click port P1. Select Timing-Transparent-Mapped to ODU under the drop down
menu of Timing Transparent Mode parameter. Similarly configure for port P2. Click
Submit and accept modifications.
7. In the node UI create ODU connections between the ports P1 to P3 and P2 to P4.
Go to OTN > ODU Connections and Click Create New Connection. Select
Capacity as ODU2, enter the name of Circuit Identifier, Directionality as 2WAY,
Source ODU as port P1 (ODU2k-<Chassis>-<slot>-<port>-0) and Destination
ODU as port P3 (ODU2k-<Chassis>-<slot>-<port>-0). Similarly create ODU
connections between port P2 and port P4. Click Submit and accept modifications.
8. Feed the STM-64/OC-192 traffic from the Test set to the port P1
9. Monitor the Rx signal at port P1. Verify that no frames are lost.
348

10. Record the result in Test Performance for HCPSLine03 card. The result veri-
Table 20: Test performance- HCPSLine03 card
Port Number Result
STM-64 OTU2
P1 Not Applicable
P2 Not Applicable
P3 Not Applicable
P4 Not Applicable
18.3.4 Testing Procedure in IntraCard transponder mode

3. Connect the test set to the port P1.
5. Connect optical fiber cables between ports P3 and P4.
349

The overall setup is shown in the following diagram.

Figure 323: Setup for testing in IntraCard TRANS/MUXPONDER mode

number link corresponding to HCPSLine03 card, the HCPSLine03 Aggregate
Card page appears. Perform the following steps on this page:
— Configure card in IntraCard TRANS/MUXPONDER mode. Click Configure Card and
select IntraCard TRANS/MUXPONDER under the drop down menu of Card
Configuration. Click Submit and accept modifications.
— Configure interface P1 and P2 to STM-64/10GE-LAN, P3 and P4 to OTU2/OTU2e. Click
Ports Configuration and select the desired configuration for each interface. Click
Note: If the interfaces P1 and P2 are configured to STM-64, configure

interfaces P3 and P4 to OTU2. If the interfaces P1and P2 are configured to
10GE-LAN, configure interfaces P3 and P4 to OTU2e.
b. Admin up all the interfaces.

c. Create Transponder configuration.
Go to OTN > Transponder/Muxponder > View/ProvisionTransponder/

Muxponder in the navigation pane. The View Transponder/Muxponder
preview pane appears. Click Create a new Transponder/Muxponder link. Select
350

the Type as transponder option from the drop down menu, The Network Port
as OTU2/OTU2e, and Client Port as STM-64/ETH respectively.
7. Feed the STM-64/10GE traffic from the Test set to the interface P1.
8. Monitor the Rx signal at interface P1. Verify that no frames are lost.
Table 21: Test Performance- HCPSLine03 Card
Port Number Result

P1
P2
P3
P4

This procedure helps you to perform the testing traffic on interfaces of HCPSLine08 card.



18.4.2 Procedure for Testing in SDH Gateway card mode

Follow this procedure to test the HCPSLine08 card:
351

3. Connect the Test set to the port P3.

4. Loopback at port P1 and P2.
5. Connect optical fiber cables between ports.
The overall setup is as follows:

Figure 324: Setup for testing in SDH Gateway card mode

a. Configure HCPSLine08 card in SDH GATEWAY Card mode.
Go to Inventory > Node Inventory in the navigation pane and Click the Slot
number link corresponding to HCPSLine08 card. HCPSLine08 Aggregate Card
page appears. Click Configure Card and Select SDH GATEWAY Card under the
drop down menu of Card Configuration.
b. Admin Up the required ports.
c. Provision bulk cross-connects (that is 16 cross-connects) between interfaces P1
and P3.
Go to Configuration > Cross-Connect. The Configure Cross-connects page

appears. Click Add Cross-connect, Add Cross-connects page appears. Enter
the value of Number of Connections as 16 and provision a cross connect of VC4
capacity with Source Port as P3 and Destination Port as P1. Similarly, create
other cross-connects as mentioned in the Cross-connects Provisioning-
HCPSLine08 (SDH GATEWAY Card) table.
7. Feed the STM-16/OC-48 traffic from the Test set to the interface P3 of HCPSLine08
card.
352

8. Monitor the Rx signal from interface P10 of HCPSLine08 card. Verify that the no
frames are lost.
Table 22: Cross-connects Provisioning - HCPSLine08 (SDH GATEWAY Card)
Cross-Connects on Ports STM#
P1 and P3 1-16
P1 and P4 17-32
P1 and P5 33-48
P1 and P6 49-64
P2 and P7 1-16
P2 and P8 17-32
P2 and P9 33-48
P2 and P10 49-64
Port Number Result
STM-64/OC-192 STM-16/OC-48
P1 Not Applicable
P2 Not Applicable
P3 Not Applicable
P4 Not Applicable
P5 Not Applicable
P6 Not Applicable
P7 Not Applicable
P8 Not Applicable
P9 Not Applicable
P10 Not Applicable
18.4.3 Procedure for Testing in OTN FlexiCard mode

Follow this procedure to test the HCPSLine08 card;
353

Note: For more details, refer to TJ1600 R5.4.3.2 Hardware Description Guide,
TPN: 170-DOC000154-E.
3. Connect the Ethernet test set to the port P3.

4. Connect optical fiber cables between ports P1-P2, P4-P5, P6-P7, P8-P9, P10-P11,
P12-P13, P14-P15, and P16-P17.
The overall setup is shown in the following figure:

Figure 325: Setup for testing in OTN Configuration
6. In the node UI, perform following steps:

a. Go to Inventory > Node Inventory in the navigation pane and Click the Slot
number link corresponding to HCPSLine08 card.The HCPSLine08 Aggregate
Card page appears. On this page perform following configurations:
354

1. Configure card in OTN FlexiCard mode. Click Configure Card and select OTN FlexiCard
under the drop down menu of Card Configuration. Click Submit and accept
modifications.
2. Configure ports P1 and P2 to OTU2 and ports P3 to P18 to GE. Click Ports Configura-
tion and select the desired port configuration for each port. Click Submit and accept
modifications.
3. Admin Up the required ports.
4. Configure the ports P3 to P18 in Timing-Transparent-Mapped to ODU. Click Ports,
and click port P3. Select Timing-Transparent-Mapped to ODU under the drop down
menu of Timing Transparent Mode parameter. Similarly configure for other ports also.
5. Create eight channels for each port of P1 and P2 with bit rate of ODU0. Click Ports, and
Click port P1. Click ODU2k-1-2-1-0 and then click Create channel. Select bit rate as
ODU0 and select one Source Tributary Slot and one Sink Tributary Slot for each
channel. Similarly, create eight channels for port P2 also.
b. Create ODU connections between the SDH ports (P3 to P10) and OTU ports (P1
and P2). Go to OTN > ODU Connections and Click Create New Connection.
Select Capacity as ODU0, enter the name of Circuit Identifier, Directional-
ity as 2WAY, Source ODU and Destination ODU for eight ODU connections is
provided in the table ODU Connections.
Note: For more details on configuring card or ODU connections, refer to

TJ1600 Product Family User Interface Guide.
7. Feed the Ethernet traffic from the test set to the port P3.
Table 24: ODU connections
ODU Connection Source ODU Destination ODU
P3 to P1 ODU0k-1-2-3-0 ODU0j-1-2-1-1
P4 to P2 ODU0k-1-2-4-0 ODU0j-1-2-2-1
P5 to P1 ODU0k-1-2-5-0 ODU0j-1-2-1-2
P6 to P2 ODU0k-1-2-6-0 ODU0j-1-2-2-2
P7 to P1 ODU0k-1-2-7-0 ODU0j-1-2-1-3
P8 to P2 ODU0k-1-2-8-0 ODU0j-1-2-2-3
P9 to P1 ODU0k-1-2-9-0 ODU0j-1-2-1-4
P10 to P2 ODU0k-1-2-10-0 ODU0j-1-2-2-4
P11 to P1 ODU0k-1-2-11-0 ODU0j-1-2-1-5
P12 to P2 ODU0k-1-2-12-0 ODU0j-1-2-2-5
P13 to P1 ODU0k-1-2-13-0 ODU0j-1-2-1-6
P14 to P2 ODU0k-1-2-14-0 ODU0j-1-2-2-6
P15 to P1 ODU0k-1-2-15-0 ODU0j-1-2-1-7
355

Table 24: ODU connections
ODU Connection Source ODU Destination ODU
P16 to P2 ODU0k-1-2-16-0 ODU0j-1-2-2-7
P17 to P1 ODU0k-1-2-17-0 ODU0j-1-2-1-8
P18 to P2 ODU0k-1-2-18-0 ODU0j-1-2-2-8
Port Number Result
STM-16 OTU2
P1 Not Applicable
P2 Not Applicable
P3 Not Applicable
P4 Not Applicable
P5 Not Applicable
P6 Not Applicable
P7 Not Applicable
P8 Not Applicable
P9 Not Applicable
P10 Not Applicable
P11 Not Applicable
P12 Not Applicable
P13 Not Applicable
P14 Not Applicable
P15 Not Applicable
P16 Not Applicable
P17 Not Applicable
P18 Not Applicable
18.4.4 Procedure for testing HCPSLine08 interfaces in

Intra Card MUXPONDER mode
3. Connect the Tx of the Test set to the port Rx of port P3 and Rx of the Test set to the
port Tx of port P14.
4. Connect optical fiber cables between ports as shown in the set up.
356

The overall setup is shown in the following figure:

Figure 326: Setup for testing in Intra Card Muxponder Mode

357

1. Configure card in Intra Card TRANS/MUXPONDER mode. Click Configure Card and
select Intra Card TRANS/MUXPONDER under the drop down menu of Card
2. Configure ports P1 and P2 to OTU2 and ports P3 to P18 to STM1/4/GE. Click Ports Con-
figuration and select the desired port configuration for each port. Click Submit and
b. Admin up the required ports.
c. Create Muxponder configuration.
» Go to OTN > Transponder/Muxponder > View/ProvisionTransponder/
Muxponder in the navigation pane. The View Transponder/Muxponder preview
pane appears. Click Create a new Transponder/Muxponder link.
» Select the Type as muxponder and Network Port as OTU2 from the drop down
menu options.
» Click Add a Client Port to add 16 client ports that is P3 to P18. Select the client port
from drop down menu and select the TS (Time Slot) and the TPN (Tributary Port
Number) to be used by the client port as given in the table Time slots and TPN -
HCPSLine08 (Muxponder mode).
Note: Follow the time slot mentioned for the corresponding port number in the
table and they cannot be interchanged. For example, the Time slot mentioned
for port P3 cannot be interchanged with port P4.
6. Feed the SDH/Ethernet traffic from the test set to the port P3.
Table 26: Time slots and TPN - HCPSLine08 (Muxponder mode)
Port No. Time Slot TPN
P3 P1 - 1 1
P4 P1 - 2 2
P5 P1 - 3 3
P6 P1 - 4 4
P7 P2 - 1 1
P8 P2 - 2 2
P9 P2 - 3 3
P10 P2 - 4 4
P11 P1 - 5 5
P12 P1 - 6 6
P13 P1 - 7 7
P14 P1 - 8 8
P15 P2 - 5 5
P16 P2 - 6 6
358

Port No. Time Slot TPN
P17 P2 - 7 7
P18 P2 - 8 8
Port Number Result
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P9
P10
P11
P12
P13
P14
P15
P16
P17
P18

Before you start
359



18.5.1 Procedure for testing in Muxponder mode

3. Connect the Tx of the Ethernet test set to the Rx of port P4 and Rx of Ethernet test
set to the Tx of port P13 as shown in the set up.
4. Connect optical fiber cables between the ports as shown in the following setup:
5. Do the following as appropriate:
360

— For testing card in 10x10G TO 1xOTU4 MUXPONDER, connect physical loopback at port
P1.
— For testing card in 10x10G TO 1xOTU4 MUXPONDER QSFP_NP, connect physical
loopback at port P2.
Following is the set for testing card in card in 10x10G TO 1xOTU4 MUXPONDER
mode.
Figure 327: Setup for testing HCPSLine12 card

number link corresponding to HCPSLine12 card. The HCPSLine12 Intelligent
» Configure card in desired muxponder mode. Click Configure Card and select
10x10G TO 1xOTU4 MUXPONDER or 10x10G TO 1xOTU4 MUXPONDER
QSFP_NP under the drop down menu of Card Configuration. Click Submit and
» Configure interfaces P4 to P13 to the desired capacity and interface P1 or P2 to OTU4
based on the muxponder mode selected. Note that only one port can be changed at a
time. Click Ports Configuration and select the desired configuration for each
interface. Click Submit and accept modifications.
b. Create Muxponder configuration.
menu options.
» Click Add a Client Port to add 10 client interfaces that is P4 to P13. Select the client
interface from drop down menu and select the TS (Time Slot) and the TPN (Tributary
361

Port Number) to be used by the client interface as given in the table Time slots and
TPN - HCPSLine12 (Muxponder mode).
7. Feed the traffic from the Test set to the interface P4.
8. Monitor the traffic on the Ethernet test set received from interface P13. Verify that
no frames are lost.
that all the optical interfaces are functioning correctly.
Port No. Time Slot & TPN
P4 1 to 8
P5 9 to 16
P6 17 to 24
P7 25 to 32
P8 33 to 40
P9 41 to 48
P10 49 to 56
P11 57 to 64
P12 65 to 72
P13 73 to 80
Port Number Result
P1/P2
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P9
P10
P11
P12
P13
362

18.5.2 Procedure for testing in Flexi 100G plus 10x10G to

1x OTU4
Case 1: With Mapping type- GMP Mapping, configure port P2 to 100GE.
Connect the Ethernet test set to port P2.
1. Loopback at port P1. The setup is as follows:
Figure 328: Setup- Flexi 100G plus 10x10G to OTU4 Muxponder

number link corresponding to HCPSLine12 card.The HCPSLine12 Intelligent
b. Configure card in Flexi 100G plus 10x10G TO 1xOTU4 MUXPONDER mode.
Click Configure Card and select Flexi 100G plus 10x10G TO 1xOTU4 MUX-
PONDER under the drop down menu of Card Configuration. Click Submit
c. Configure interface P2 to 100GE and interface P1 to OTU4. Note that only one
port can be changed at a time. Click Ports Configuration and select the desired
configuration for each interface. Click Submit and accept modifications.
Note: When Port P2 is configured to 100GE, other client ports that is P4 to P13
cannot be used.
d. Create Muxponder configuration.
363


preview pane appears. Click Create a new Transponder/Muxponder link.
menu options.
» Click Add a Client Port to add client interfaces that is P2. Select the client interface
from drop down menu and select the TS (Time Slot) and the TPN (Tributary Port
Number) to be used by the client interface.
4. Monitor the traffic on the Ethernet test set received. Verify that no frames are lost.
Port Number Result
P1
P2
Case 2: With Mapping type- ODU Flex, user can configure port P2 to 100GE and any 9
ports between P4 to P13 to 10GE by choosing the minimum time slots 1-8 for 100GE
port. The procedure is explained for 40 time slots for 100GE port, where P2 can be
configured as 100GE and 5 ports that is, P4 to P8 as 10GE.
You can choose the desired time slots between 1 to 80.
Figure 329: Test setup 2- Flexi 100G plus 10x10G to OTU4 Muxponder
In the node UI, perform following steps:

1. Go to Inventory > Node Inventory in the navigation pane and Click the Slot
364

2. Configure card in Flexi 100G plus 10x10G TO 1xOTU4 MUXPONDER mode.

Click Configure Card and select Flexi 100G plus 10x10G TO 1xOTU4 MUXPO-
NDER under the drop down menu of Card Configuration. Click Submit and
3. Configure interface P2 to 100GE, After P2 configured as 100GE, P4-P13 cannot be
configured.
To configure P4 to P8 as 10GE, the ODUflex channel must be created as per

following steps:
For port P3, click Facility > Ethernet, configure 100GE mapping type as
"Mapping_GFP_F_ODUFlex", click Submit.
Click ODU4, create channel and provide PayLoad Capacity as 40, Bit Rate as
ODUflex, click Submit. The ODUflex channel is created.
4. Click Ports Configuration and select the desired configuration for each interface.
Click Submit and accept modifications.
5. Create Muxponder configuration.

a. Select the Type as muxponder and Network Port as OTU4 from the drop
down menu options.
b. To add a client port, perform the following steps.
» Click Add a Client Port to add client interface P2. Select the client interface from
drop down menu and select 40 TS (Time Slot) to be used by the client interface and
Click Submit.
interface from drop down menu and select the remaining TS (Time Slot) and the TPN
(Tributary Port Number) to be used by the client interface and click Submit.
6. Feed the 100GE traffic from the Test set-1 to the interface P2 and 10GE from test
set -2 to P4.
7. Monitor the traffic on the test set received. Verify that no frames are lost.
Table 31: Time slots and TPN - HCPSLine12 card
Port No. Time Slot
P2 1 to 40
P4 41 to 48
P5 49 to 56
P6 57 to 64
P7 65 to 72
P8 73 to 80
365

Table 32: Test Performance- HCPSLine12 card
Port Number Result
P1
P2
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
18.5.3 Procedure for testing in Flexi 2x40G plus 10x10G

to 1x OTU4
2. Insert a working HCPSLine12 card in supported slot
Case 1: Configure port P2, P3 to 40GE, P4, P5 to 10GE and port 1 to OTU4. The overall
setup is as follows:
Figure 330: Test setup- Flexi 2x40G plus 10x10G to OTU4 Muxponder
366

number link corresponding to HCPSLine12 card. HCPSLine12 Intelligent Card
page appears. On this page perform following configurations:
a. Configure card in Flexi 2x40G plus 10x10G TO 1xOTU4 MUXPONDER
mode. Click Configure Card and select Flexi 2x40G plus 10x10G TO
1xOTU4 MUXPONDER under the drop down menu of Card Configuration. Click
b. Configure interface P2, P3 to 40GE, P4, P5 to 10GE and port P1 to OTU4. Note
that only one port can be changed at a time. Click Ports Configuration and
select the desired configuration for each interface. Click Submit and accept
modifications.
a. Go to OTN > Transponder/Muxponder > View/ProvisionTransponder/
b. Select the Type as muxponder and Network Port as OTU4 from the drop
down menu options.
c. Click Add a Client Port to add client interfaces that is P2, P3, P4 and P5. Select
the client interface from drop down menu and select the TS (Time Slot) and the
TPN (Tributary Port Number) to be used by the client interface.
3. Feed the 40GE traffic from the Test set-1 to the interface P2 and 10GE traffic from
Test set-2 to port P4.
Port Number Result
P1
P2
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
Case 2: User can configure port P2, P3 to 40GE and any 8 ports between P4 to P13 to
10GE by choosing the minimum time slots for 40GE port. The procedure is explained for
8 time slots for each port P2 and P3, user can choose the desired time slots between 1
to 31.
367

Figure 331: Test setup 2- Flexi 2x40G plus 10x10G to OTU4 Muxponder

a. Configure card in Flexi 2x40G plus 10x10G TO 1xOTU4 MUXPONDER
mode. Click Configure Card and select Flexi 2x40G plus 10x10G TO
1xOTU4 MUXPONDER under the drop down menu of Card Configuration. Click
b. Configure interface P2, P3 to 40GE. After P2 and P3 configured as 40GE, only
two 10G ports can be configured. To configure P4 to P11 as 10GE, ODUflex
channel must be created as per the following steps:
2. For Port P2, click Facility >Ethernet, configure 40GE mapping type as "Map-
ping_GFP_F_ODUFlex", click Submit. Click ODU3, create channel and provide
PayLoad Capacity as 8, Bit Rate as ODUflex, click Submit. The ODUflex chan-
nel is created. Perform the same steps for Port P3.
a. Click Ports Configuration and select the desired configuration for each
interface. Click Submit and accept modifications.
a. Go to OTN > Transponder/Muxponder > View/ProvisionTransponder/
b. Select the Type as muxponder and Network Port as OTU4 from the drop
down menu options.
c. To Add a client port, perform the following steps.
368

» Click Add a Client Port to add client interface P2 and P3. Select the client interface
from drop down menu, select 8 TS (Time Slot) to be used by the each client interface
and click Submit.
interface from drop down menu, select the remaining TS (Time Slot) and the TPN
(Tributary Port Number) to be used by the client interface and click Submit.
4. Feed the 40GE traffic from the Test set-1 to the interface P2 and 10GE from test set
-2 to P4.
Port Number Result
P1
P2
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P9
P10
P11
18.6 Testing HCPSLine20 Card


The following precautionary measures have to be taken:
369



18.6.2 Procedure for testing STM-16 Interfaces in SDH

only mode
3. Connect the test set up as shown in the following figure.
370

Figure 332: Test setup for Testing HCPSLine20 card
— Connect the Test set to the port P1.

— Connect optical fiber cables between ports P2 and P3, P4 and P5, P6 and P7, P8 and P9,
P10 and P11, P12 and P13, P14 and P15, P16 and P17, P18 and P19, P20 and P21, P22
and P23, P24 and P25, P26 and P27, P28 and P29, P30 and P31.
— Loopback at P32.
Card page appears. Perform the following configurations on this page.
» Configure card in SDH Only mode. Click Configure Card and select SDH only
under the drop down menu of Card Configuration. Click Submit and accept
modifications.
» Click Port Configuration and configure all ports to STM-16 mode. Click Submit and
» Admin Up the required ports.
b. Provision cross-connects between ports P1 and P2, P3 and P4, P5 and P6, P7
and P8, P9 and P10 and so on for all the 32 ports.
» Go to Configuration > Cross-Connect, the Configure Cross-connects page
appears. Click Add Cross-connect and provision a cross connect of VC4/ VC4_4c/
371

VC4_16c capacity with 'Source Port' as port P1 and 'Destination Port' as port P2.
Similarly, create cross-connects for other ports also.
5. Feed the STM-16 traffic from the Test set to the port P1.
6. Monitor the Rx signal at port P1 connected to the Test set. Verify that no traffic is
lost.
Port Number Result
P1
P2
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P9
P10
P11
P12
P13
P14
P15
P16
P17
P18
P19
P20
P21
P22

372




18.7.2 Procedure for testing 10x10G 1x100G tributary

and cross-connect
3. Connect the test set up as shown in the following figure:
373


Figure 333: Test Setup: 10x10G 1x100G TRUBUTARY AND CROSS-CONNECT
— Connect the Tx of Test set to the Rx of port P1 and Rx of Test set to the Tx of port P10.
— Connect optical fiber cables between user-network interface (UNI) the ports in Tandem
connection as shown in set up.
— Connect physical loopbacks at network-network interface (NNI) ports as shown.
number link corresponding to HCPSLine22 card,the HCPSLine22 Aggregate
374

» Configure card in 10x10G 1x100G TRIBUTARY AND CROSS-CONNECT mode.

» Click Configure Card and select 10x10G 1x100G TRIBUTARY AND CROSS-
CONNECT under the drop down menu of Card Configuration. Click Submit and
» Configure UNI ports as STM-64/10GE LAN/OTU2/OTU2e/8G FC.
» Click Ports Configuration and select the desired port configuration for each port.
» Configure the UNI ports in Timing-Transparent-Mapped to ODU.
» Click Ports, and click port P1. Select Timing-Transparent-Mapped to ODU under
the drop down menu of Timing Transparent Mode parameter. Similarly, configure
for other ports also.
b. Create ODU connections between the UNI and NNI ports of HCPSLine22 card.
» Go to OTN > ODU Connections and Click Create New Connection. Select
Capacity based on the UNI port capacity, enter the name of Circuit Identifier,
Directionality as 2WAY, Source ODU and Destination ODU.
5. Feed the desired traffic from the Test set to the port P1.
lost.
Table 36: Test Performance - HCPSLine22 card
Port Number Result
18.7.3 Procedure for testing 10x10G flexi tributary and

cross-connect
375

Figure 334: Test setup: 10x10G FLEXI TRIBUTARY AND CROSS-CONNECT mode
— Connect optical fiber cables between user-network interface (UNI) the ports in Tandem
connection as shown in set up.
— Connect physical loopbacks at network-network interface (NNI) ports as shown.
number link corresponding to HCPSLine22 card, HCPSLine22 Aggregate Card
page appears. Perform the following configurations on this page.
» Configure card in 10x10G FLEXI TRIBUTARY AND CROSS-CONNECT mode.
» Click Configure Card and select 10x10G FLEXI TRIBUTARY AND CROSS-
CONNECT under the drop down menu of Card Configuration. Click Submit and
» Configure UNI ports as STM1/4/16/64/10GE/1GE/1GFC/2GFC/8GFC
» Click Ports Configuration and select the desired port configuration for each port.
» Configure the UNI ports in Timing-Transparent-Mapped to ODU.
» Click Ports, and Click port P3. Select Timing-Transparent-Mapped to ODU under
the drop down menu of Timing Transparent Mode parameter. Similarly configure for
other ports also.
b. Create ODU connections between the UNI and NNI ports of HCPSLine22 card.
» Go to OTN > ODU Connections and Click Create New Connection. Select
Capacity based on the UNI port capacity, enter the name of Circuit Identifier,
Directionality as 2WAY, Source ODU and Destination ODU.
5. Feed the desired traffic from the Test set to the port P3.
lost.
376

18.7.4 Procedure for testing in MUXPONDER mode

Figure 335: Setup for testing HCPSLine22 in MUXPONDER mode
— Connect optical fiber cables between ports in Tandem connection as shown in set up.
— Connect Loopback at port P11.
» Configure card in 10x10G TO 1xOTU4 MUXPONDER mode. Click Configure Card
and select 10x10G TO 1xOTU4 MUXPONDER under the drop down menu of Card
» Configure ports P1 to P10 to STM-64/10GE-LANOTU2/OTU2e. Click Ports
b. Create Muxponder configuration.
377


menu options.
» Click Add a Client Port to add 10 client ports i.e ports P1 to P10. Select the client
port from drop down menu and select the TS (Time Slot) and the TPN (Tributary Port
Number) to be used by the client port as given in the following table Time slots and
TPN - HCPSLine22 (Muxponder mode).
5. Feed the traffic from the Test set to the port P1.
6. Monitor the Rx signal at Test set connected to port P10. Verify that no traffic is lost.
Port No. Time Slot & TPN
P1 1 to 8
P2 9 to 16
P3 17 to 24
P4 25 to 32
P5 33 to 40
P6 41 to 48
P7 49 to 56
P8 57 to 64
P9 65 to 72
P10 73 to 80
Port Number Result
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P9
378

Port Number Result
P10
P11
18.7.5 Procedure for testing HCPSLine22 in

TRANSPONDER mode
1. Insert a working controller card in supported slot.
Figure 336: Setup for testing HCPSLine22 in TRANSPONDER mode
— Connect Loopback on ports P1 to P5.
379

» Configure card in 5 10G TRANSPONDER mode. Click Configure Card and select 5
10G TRANSPONDER under the drop down menu of Card Configuration. Click
» To configure NNI ports, Click Ports Configuration and configure ports P1 to P5 to
OTU2/OTU2e/OTU1f.
» To configure ports P6 to P10 to STM-64/10GE-LAN/OTU2/OTU2e/8GFC/
12GFC/ OTU1f. Click Ports Configuration and select the desired port
configuration for each port. Click Submit and accept modifications.
b. Create Transponder configuration.
» Select the Type as transponder, and Network Port as OTU2/OTU2e/ OTU1f from
drop down.
» Select the Client Port from the drop down menu. Click Create.
Port Number Result
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P9
P10
18.7.6 Procedure for testing STM-64 interfaces in

10x10G SDH Flexi Mode
380

Figure 337: Setup for Testing HCPSLine22 in SDH Flexi Mode

— Connect optical fiber cables between ports P2 and P3, P4 and P5, P6 and P7, P8 and P9.
— Loopback at port P10.
» Configure card in 10x10G SDH FLEXI mode. Click Configure Card and select
10x10G SDH FLEXI under the drop down menu of Card Configuration. Click
» Configure ports P1 to P10 to STM-64. Click Ports Configuration and select the
desired port configuration for each port. Click Submit and accept modifications.
b. Provision cross-connects between ports P1 and P2, P3 and P4, P5 and P6, P7
and P8, P9 and P10.
» Go to Configuration > Cross-Connect, the Configure Cross-connects page
capacity with Source Port as port P1 and Destination Port as port P2. Similarly,
create cross-connects for other ports also.
5. Feed the STM-64 traffic from the Test set to the port P1.
381

lost.
18.7.7 Procedure for Testing HCPSLine22 in 10x10G OTN

and 1x100G OTN
2. Insert a two working HCPSLine22 card in supported slot (for example, the explana-
tion is given for cards in slot 1 and 2).
Figure 338: Setup for Testing HCPSLine22 in OTN TRIBUTARY Mode
— Connect the Tx of Test set to the Rx of port P1 and Rx of Test set to the Tx of port P10
on 1st slot card.
— Connect optical fiber cables between ports in Tandem connection on 1st slot card as
shown in set up.
— Connect Loopback at port P11 on 2nd slot card.
a. Go to Inventory > Node Inventory in the navigation pane and click Slot 1
number link corresponding to HCPSLine22 card in 1st slot, HCPSLine22
Aggregate Card page appears. Perform the following configurations on this
page:
382

» Configure card in 10x10 OTN Tributary mode. Click Configure Card and select
10x10 OTN Tributary under the drop down menu of Card Configuration. Click
» Configure ports P1 to P10 to 10GE-LAN. Click Ports Configuration and select the
desired port configuration for each port. Click Submit and accept modifications.
» Configure the ports P1 to P10 in Timing-Transparent-Mapped to ODU. Click
ports, and click port P1. Select Timing-Transparent-Mapped to ODU under the
drop down menu of Timing Transparent Mode parameter. Similarly configure for
other ports also.
b. Go to Inventory > Node Inventory in the navigation pane and click Slot 2
number link corresponding to HCPSLine22 card in 2nd slot, The HCPSLine22
Aggregate Card page appears. Perform the following configurations on this
page.
» Configure card in 1x100G OTN TRIBUTARY mode. Click Configure Card and
select 1x100G OTN TRIBUTARY under the drop down menu of Card Configuration.
» Configure ports P11 (appears as Port No 1 in UI) to OTU4. Click Ports
Configuration and select the desired port configuration. Click Submit and accept
modifications.
» Admin Up the port.
» Create 10 channels on OTU4 port with bit rate of ODU2e capacity. Click Ports, and
click port OTU4-1-2-1. Then click ODU4k-1-2-1-0 and then click Create channel.
Select bit rate as ODU2e, enter the 'Source and Sink Tributary Port Number',
select eight Source Tributary Slot and eight Sink Tributary Slot for each channel.
c. Create ODU connections between the 10GE-LAN ports of HCPSLine22 on 1st
slot and OTU4 port of HCPSLine22 on 2nd slot.
» Go to OTN > ODU Connections and click Create New Connection. Select
Capacity as ODU2e, enter the name of Circuit Identifier, Directionality as 2WAY,
Source ODU and Destination ODU. The Source ODU and Destination ODU
383

selection for ten ODU connections is provided in the following table as ODU
Connections.
Table 40: ODU connections - HCPSLine22
Port No. Source ODU Destination ODU
1st slot card 2nd slot card
P1 ODU2ek-1-1-1-0 ODU2ej-1-2-1-1
P2 ODU2ek-1-1-2-0 ODU2ej-1-2-1-2
P3 ODU2ek-1-1-3-0 ODU2ej-1-2-1-3
P4 ODU2ek-1-1-4-0 ODU2ej-1-2-1-4
P5 ODU2ek-1-1-5-0 ODU2ej-1-2-1-5
P6 ODU2ek-1-1-6-0 ODU2ej-1-2-1-6
P7 ODU2ek-1-1-7-0 ODU2ej-1-2-1-7
P8 ODU2ek-1-1-8-0 ODU2ej-1-2-1-8
P9 ODU2ek-1-1-9-0 ODU2ej-1-2-1-9
P10 ODU2ek-1-1-10-0 ODU2ej-1-2-1-10
5. Feed the 10GE traffic from the Test set to the port P1.
lost.
7. Record the result in Test Performance for HCPSLine22 card. The result verifies that
all the optical ports are functioning correctly.
Table 41: Test performance - HCPSLine22 card
Port Number Result
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P9
P10
384


This procedure helps you to perform the testing traffic on interfaces of HCPSLine24 card
Before you start


18.8.1 Procedure for testing HCPSLine24 in Transponder

Mode
385

Figure 339: Setup for testing HCPSLine24 in TRANSPONDER mode

— Loopback at port P4.
number link corresponding to HCPSLine24 card, HCPSLine24 Intelligent Card
page appears. Perform the following steps on this page:
» Click Configure Card and select 1x100G TRANSPONDER OTU4 NP under the
drop down menu of Card Configuration. Click Submit and accept modifications.
» Click Ports Configuration and configure interface P1 to OTU4 and P4 (appears as
P2 in UI) to OTU4/100GE. Click Submit and accept modifications.
pane appears. Click Create a new Transponder/Muxponder link. Select the Type
as transponder option from the drop down menu, Network Port as OTU4, and
Client Port as OTU4/100GE.
5. Feed the OTN traffic from the Test set to the port P1.
6. Monitor the Rx signal at interface P1. Verify that no frames are lost.
Port Number Result
P1
P4


386



18.9.2 Procedure for testing in TRANSPONDER mode

387

Figure 340: Test set-up for HCPSLine25 card
— Connect the Tx of Test set to the Rx of port P11 and Rx of Test set to the Tx of port
P20.
— Connect Loopback on ports P1 to P10.
» Configure card in 10 10G TRANSPONDER mode. Click Configure Card and select
10 10G TRANSPONDER under the drop down menu of Card Configuration. Click
» To configure NNI ports, click Ports Configuration and configure ports P1 to P10 to
OTU2/OTU2e
» To configure ports P11 to P20 to STM-64/10GE-LAN/OTU2/OTU2e.Click Ports
Muxponder in the navigation pane. The View Transponder/Muxponder preview pane
appears. Click Create a new Transponder/Muxponder link.
» Select the Type as transponder, and Network Port as OTU2/OTU2e from drop
down.
» Select the Client Port from the drop down menu. Click Create.
388

Port Number Result
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P9
P10
P11
P12
P13
P14
P15
P16
P17
P18
P19
P20


389



18.10.2 Procedure for testing in Muxponder mode

390

Figure 341: Setup for testing in MUXPONDER Mode

number link corresponding to HCPSLine26 card. The HCPSLine26 Intelligent
» Configure card in 20x10G TO 2 OTU4 MUXPONDER mode. Click Configure Card
and select 20x10G TO 2 OTU4 MUXPONDER under the drop down menu of Card
» Configure interface P1 to OTUC2 interfaces and P2 to P21 to STM-64/10GE-LAN/
OTU/OTU2e. Note that only one port can be changed at a time. Click Ports
Configuration and select the desired configuration for each interface. Click Submit
b. Create two logical OTU4 channels:
391

To map client port to OTUC2, two logical channels need to be created.

» Click Facilities > ODU2C> Create Channel.
» Enter Source and Sink Tributary Port number, select 20 source and sink tributray slot
for two channels. OTU4-<ci>-<si>-22 and OTU4-<ci>-<si>-23 logical channels
are created.
menu options.
» Select the network port as OTU4-<ci>-<si>-22 and corresponding 10 client port i.e.,
P2 to P11 from the drop down, select the TS (Time Slot) and the TPN (Tributary Port
Number) to be used by the client interface. Similarly, select network port as OTU4-
<ci>-<si>-23 and remaining 10 client ports that is, P12 to P21 from the drop-down,
select the remaining TS (Time Slot) and TPN (Tributary Port Number) to be used by
the client interface.
no frames are lost.
Port No. Time Slot
P4 1 to 8
P5 9 to 16
P6 17 to 24
P7 25 to 32
P8 33 to 40
P9 41 to 48
P10 49 to 56
P11 57 to 64
P12 65 to 72
P13 73 to 80
P14 81 to 88
P15 89 to 96
P16 96 to 104
P17 105 to 112
P18 113 to 120
P19 121 to 128
392

Port No. Time Slot
P20 129 to 136
P21 137 to 144
Port Number Result
P1
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P9
P10
P11
P12
P13
P14
P15
P16
P17
P18
P19
P20
P21


393



18.11.2 Procedure for testing in 2xFlexi 100G to 2xOTU4

Figure 342: Test Setup- 2xFlexi 100G to 2xOTU4 Transponder

394

number link corresponding to the HCPSLine27 card. The HCPSLine27
Intelligent Card page appears. On this page perform following configurations:
» Configure card in Two Flexi 100G to 2 OTU4 Muxponder mode. Click Configure
Card and select Two Flexi 100G to 2 OTU4 Muxponder under the drop down
menu of Card Configuration. Click Submit and accept modifications.
» Configure interfaces interface P1 to OTUC2 and P2, P3 to 100GE/ OTU4. Note that
only one port can be changed at a time. Click Ports Configuration and select the
desired configuration for each interface. Click Submit and accept modifications.

» Enter Source and Sink Tributary Port number, select 20 source and sink tributray slot
for two channels. OTU4-<ci>-<si>-4 and OTU4-<ci>-<si>-5 logical channels are
created.
» Select the Type as Transponder.
» Select the network port and corresponding client port each port from the drop down
and select the TS (Time Slot) and the TPN (Tributary Port Number) to be used by the
client interface.
no frames are lost.
Port Number Result
P1
P2
P3
18.11.3 Procedure to test Line27 in 10X10G to OTU4 +

flexi 100G to OTU4
2. Insert a working HCPSLine27 card in supported slot. The overall setup is as follows:
395

Figure 343: Test Setup- 10x10G to OTU4 Muxponder

number link corresponding to HCPSLine27 card. HCPSLine27 Intelligent Card
page appears. On this page perform following configurations:
» Configure card in 10X10G to OTU4 Muxponder + Flexi 100G to OTU4
Transponder mode. Click Configure Card and select 10X10G to OTU4
Muxponder + Flexi 100G to OTU4 Transponder under the drop down menu of
Card Configuration. Click Submit and accept modifications.
» Configure interfaces interface P1 to OTUC2, P2 to 100GE and P4-P13 STM-64/10GE/
OTU2/OTU2e/8GFC/12GFC. Note that only one port can be changed at a time. Click
Ports Configuration and select the desired configuration for each interface. Click
396


» Enter Source and Sink Tributary Port number, select 20 source and sink tributray
slot for two channels. OTU4-<ci>-<si>-14 and OTU4-<ci>-<si>-15 logical
channels are created.
» Select the Type as muxponder.
» Select the network port as OTU4-<ci>-<si>-14 and corresponding client port each
port from the drop down and select the TS (Time Slot) and the TPN (Tributary Port
Number) to be used by the client interface. Similarly, select network port as OTU4-
<ci>-<si>-15 and corresponding 10 client ports that is, P4 to P13 from the drop-
down, select the remaining TS (Time Slot) and TPN (Tributary Port Number) to be
used by the client interface.
4. Feed the 100GE traffic from the Test set-1 and 10GE traffic from Test set-2.
5. Monitor the traffic on the Ethernet test set received from interface P2 and P13. Ver-
ify that no frames are lost.
Port Number Result
P1
P2
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P9
P10
P11
P12
P13

Before you start
397



18.12.1 Procedure for testing 2x100G TRANSPONDER

OTU4 NP mode
398

Figure 344: Test Setup for Testing HCPSLine28 Card

— Connect optical fiber cables between ports P1 and P4.
— Connect loopback at port P3.
» Click Configure Card and select 2x100G TRANSPONDER OTU4 NP under the
drop down menu of Card Configuration. Click Submit and accept modifications.
» Click Port Configuration and configure port P1 and P4 to OTU4 and P2 and P3 to
OTU4/100GE. Click Submit and accept modifications.
pane appears. Click Create a new Transponder/Muxponder link. Select the Card
as HCPSLine28-<Ci>-<si> and Type as Transponder from the drop down.
5. Feed the traffic from Test set to Port P2.
lost.
399

Port Number Result
P1
P2
P3
P4

This procedure helps to perform the testing traffic on interfaces of HCPSLine29 card.
Before you start

electrostatic sensitive devices. Ensure to wear the anti-static strap connected to the
ESD location on the node.

18.13.1 Points to remember

• No system level alarms should be present on the node.
• For detailed configuration procedure, refer to TJ1600 Product Family User

Interface Guide of this release.
400

18.13.2 Procedure for testing 100G or 200G regenerator

OTUC1/OTUC2
Figure 345: Test Setup for Testing HCPSLine29 Card

— Connect loopback at port P14.
401

» Click Card Configuration and select 100G or 200G under the drop down menu of
Port Capacity. Select corresponding Destination Port. Click Submit and accept
modifications.
» Click Ports Configuration and select OTUC1 or OTUC2 under Add Drop Port
Configuration drop down menu. Click Submit.
b. Create configuration.
» Go to OTN > Otn Regenerator in the navigation pane. The View preview pane
appears. Click Create Regenerator Pair link. Select Primary Port, Secondary
Port from the respective drop down list. Select Enable as Regenerator Port
Pairing.
» Click Submit.
4. Feed the traffic from Test set to port P13.
lost.
Table 48: Test performance - HCPSLine29 Card
Port number Result
P13
P14

This procedure helps to perform the testing traffic on interfaces of HCPSLine31 card.
Before you start
402




• For detailed configuration procedure, refer to TJ1600 Product Family User

Interface Guide of this release.
18.14.2 Procedure for testing 100G ports on HCPSLine31
Note: Procedure is explained for testing 100GE client ports. Perform the same steps
for testing OTU4/OTUC1 client ports by selecting the appropriate port configuration.
1. Insert a working HCPSLine31 card in supported slot. Refer to Card population rule.
a. Connect the Tx of the Ethernet Test Set-1 to the Rx of port P3 and Rx of
Ethernet Test Set-1 to the Tx of port P14.
b. Connect optical fiber cables between user-network interface (UNI) ports P3 to
P14 in Tandem connection.
c. Connect physical loopbacks at network-network interface (NNI) port P2.
403

Following is the set up for testing 100G ports on HCPSLine31 card.

Figure 346: Test set up for testing 100G ports on HCPSLine31 card

a. Click Inventory > Node inventory in the navigation pane. The Node
Inventory preview pane appears. Click the Slot number corresponding to the
HCPSLine31 Card. On HCPSLine31 Intelligent Card preview page, perform
the following steps:
» Configure card mode. Click Configure Card and select 40x10G+12x100G/
3X400G/FLEX->2X600G from the drop down. Click Submit and accept
modifications.
» Configure ports P1 and P2 to OTUC6 and P3 to P14 to 100GE. Click Ports
and accept modifications. Note that only one port can be changed at a time.
» Channelize the ports P1 and P2 with bit rate of 100G capacity.
» Click Ports, and Click port OTUC6-<Ci>-<Si>-1. On Provision interface -
OTUC6-<Ci>-<Si>-1 page Click ODUC4k-<Ci>-<Si>-1-0 and then click Create
channel. Select bit rate as 100G, enter the 'Source and Sink Tributary Port
Number', select twelve Source Tributary Slot and twelve Sink Tributary Slot for
each channel.
4. Create ODU connections for 100GE ports P3 to P8 with OTUC6 port P1 and for
100GE ports P9 to P14 with OTUC6 port P2.
» Go to OTN > ODU Connections and click Create New Connection. Select
Capacity as ODUC1, enter the name of Circuit Identifier, Directionality as
2WAY, Source ODU, and Destination ODU.
» The Source ODU and Destination ODU selection for twelve ODU connections is given
in the table as ODUC1 Connections on HCPSLine31.
lost.
404

7. Record the result and verify that all the ports are functioning correctly.
Table 49: ODUC1 connections on HCPSLine31
Source ODU Destination ODU
ODUC1k-ci-si-3-0 ODUC1j-ci-si-1-1
Note: Procedure is explained for testing 10GE-LAN client ports. Perform the same
steps for testing STM64/OTU2/OTU2e client ports by selecting the appropriate port
configuration.
a. Connect the Tx of the Test Set to the Rx of port P15 and Rx of Test Set to the
Tx of port P54.
c. Connect physical loopback at network-network interface (NNI) port P1.
405



a. Go to Inventory > Node inventory in the navigation pane. The Node
Inventory preview pane appears. Click the slot number corresponding to the
modifications.
» Configure ports P2 to OTUC4 and P15 to P54 to 10GE-LAN. Click Ports
» Channelize the port P2 with bit rate of 100G capacity.
» Click Ports, and Click port OTUC4-<Ci>-<Si>-2. On Provision interface - OTUC4-
<Ci>-<Si>-2 page, Click ODUC4k-<Ci>-<Si>-2-0 and then click Create channel.
» Select bit rate as 100G, enter the Source and Sink Tributary Port Number, select
twenty Source Tributary Slot and twenty Sink Tributary Slot for each channel.
» Four logical interfaces OTUC1-<Ci>-<Si>-55, OTUC1-<Ci>-<Si>-56, OTUC1-<Ci>-
<Si>-57, and OTUC1-<Ci>-<Si>-58 are created.
b. Configure the port P2 channelized interfaces (in previous step) to create logical
OTU4 interfaces.
» Go to Configuration > Facilities > OTU and Click the ODUC1k-<Ci>-<Si>-55-0
interface corresponding to OTUC1-<Ci>-<Si>-55. On ODUC1k-<Ci>-<Si>-55-0
interface configuration page, select the Client Signal Termination Mode as
406

Terminate OTU and select the Terminate With as ODUC-<Ci>-<Si>-2-1. The

logical OTU4-<ci>-<si>-59-0 interface is created.
» Similarly configure ODUC1-<Ci>-<Si>-56-0, ODUC1-<Ci>-<Si>-57-0, and ODUC1-
<Ci>-<Si>-58-0 to create logical OTU4-<ci>-<si>-60-0, OTU4-<ci>-<si>-61-0,
and OTU4-<ci>-<si>-62-0 interfaces respectively.
» Internal ODUC1 connections get created automatically between logical ODU4s 55 to
58 to network port P2 ODUC1j.
c. Create Muxponder connection between client ports (ETH-<Ci>-<Si>-15 to ETH-
<Ci>-<Si>-54) and logical OTU4 network interfaces.
pane appears.
» Click Create a new Transponder/Muxponder. On Muxponder Options page,
select the network port as OTU4-<ci>-<si>-59-0 and the client port as ETH-<Ci>-
<Si>-15 from the drop down and select the TS and the TPN of the network interface.
Add the client interfaces ETH-<Ci>-<Si>-16 to ETH-<Ci>-<Si>-24 to OTU4-<ci>-
<si>-59-0.
» Similarly, create following muxponder configurations:
Table 50: Muxponder configurations
Network port and client ports

Network port OTU4-<ci>-<si>-60-0 and client ports ETH-<ci>-<si>-25 to ETH-<ci>-
<si>-34
<si>-44
<si>-54
lost.

Before you start
407




• For detailed configuration procedure, refer TJ1600 Product Family User Interface
Guide of this release.
c. Connect physical loopbacks at network-network interface (NNI) port P2. Follow-
ing is the set up for testing 100G ports on HCPSLine32 card.
408


modifications.
OTUC6-<Ci>-<Si>-1 page Click ODUC4k-<Ci>-<Si>-1-0 and then click Create
channel. Select bit rate as 100G, enter the Source and Sink Tributary Port
Number, select twelve Source Tributary Slot and twelve Sink Tributary Slot for
each channel.
4. Create ODU connections for 100GE ports P3 to P8 with OTUC6 port P1 and for
100GE ports P9 to P14 with OTUC6 port P2.
a. Go to OTN > ODU Connections and click Create New Connection. Select
b. The Source ODU and Destination ODU selection for twelve ODU connections
is given in the following table as ODUC1 Connections on HCPSLine32.
409

lost.

Before you start
410




• Port 3,12,13,& 14 and Port 35 to 44 are not supported.
c. Connect physical loopbacks at network-network interface (NNI) port P2. Follow-
411


HCPSLine33 card. On HCPSLine33 Intelligent Card preview page, perform
modifications.
» Admin up the required ports.
<Ci>-<Si>-1 page Click ODUC4k-<Ci>-<Si>-1-0 and then click Create channel.
Select bit rate as 100G, enter the Source and Sink Tributary Port Number, select
twelve Source Tributary Slot and twelve Sink Tributary Slot for each channel.
4. Create ODU connections for 100GE ports P4 to P11 with OTUC4 port P1.
» The Source ODU and Destination ODU selection for twelve ODU connections is
given in the table as ODUC1 Connections on HCPSLine33.
lost.
412


Note: Procedure is explained for testing 10GE-LAN client ports. Perform the same
steps for testing STM64/OTU2/OTU2e client ports by selecting the appropriate port
configuration.
a. Connect the Tx of the Test Set to the Rx of port P15 and Rx of Test Set to the
Tx of port P34. Similarly, connect the Tx of the Test Set to the Rx of port P45
and Rx of Test Set to the Tx of port P54.
P34 and P45 to P54 in Tandem connection.
c. Connect physical loopback at network-network interface (NNI) port P1. Follow-
413


a. Go to Inventory > Node inventory in the navigation pane. The Node Inventory
preview pane appears. Click the slot number corresponding to the HCPSLine33
card. On HCPSLine33 Intelligent Card preview page, perform the following
steps:
414

» Configure card mode. Click Configure Card and select 30x10G+8x100G/2X400G/

FLEX->2X400G from the drop down. Click Submit and accept modifications.
» Configure ports P2 to OTUC4, P15 to P34 and P45 to P54 to 10GE-LAN. Click Ports
» Admin up the required ports.
» Channelize the port P2 with bit rate of 100G capacity.
OTUC4-<Ci>-<Si>-2 page, Click ODUC4k-<Ci>-<Si>-2-0 and then click Create
channel.
» Select bit rate as 100G, enter the Source and Sink Tributary Port Number, select
twenty Source Tributary Slot and twenty Sink Tributary Slot for each channel.
» Four logical interfaces OTUC1-<Ci>-<Si>-55, OTUC1-<Ci>-<Si>-56, and OTUC1-
<Ci>-<Si>-58 are created.
b. Configure the port P2 channelized interfaces (in previous step) to create logical
OTU4 interfaces.
» Go to Configuration > Facilities > OTU and Click the ODUC1k-<Ci>-<Si>-55-0
interface corresponding to OTUC1-<Ci>-<Si>-55. On ODUC1k-<Ci>-<Si>-55-0
interface configuration page, select the Client Signal Termination Mode as
Terminate OTU and select the Terminate With as ODUC-<Ci>-<Si>-2-1. The
logical OTU4-<ci>-<si>-59-0 interface is created.
» Similarly, configure ODUC1-<Ci>-<Si>-56-0, and ODUC1-<Ci>-<Si>-58-0 to create
logical OTU4-<ci>-<si>-60-0, OTU4-<ci>-<si>-61-0, and OTU4-<ci>-<si>-62-0
interfaces respectively.
» Internal ODUC1 connections get created automatically between logical ODU4s 55 to
58 to network port P2 ODUC1j.
c. Create Muxponder connection between client ports (ETH-<Ci>-<Si>-18 to ETH-
<Ci>-<Si>-54) and logical OTU4 network interfaces.
pane appears.
» Click Create a new Transponder/Muxponder. On Muxponder Options page,
select the network port as OTU4-<ci>-<si>-59-0 and the client port as ETH-
<Ci>-<Si>-15 from the drop down and select the TS and the TPN of the network
interface. Add the client interfaces ETH-<Ci>-<Si>-16 to ETH-<Ci>-<Si>-24 to
OTU4-<ci>-<si>-59-0.
» Similarly, create following muxponder configurations:
Table 53: Muxponder configurations
Network port and client ports

<si>-34
<si>-54
lost.
415






• Port 3,12,13, and 14 are not supported
c. Connect physical loopbacks at network-network interface (NNI) port P2.
416



HCPSLine34 card. On HCPSLine34 Intelligent Card preview page, perform
» Configure card mode. Click Configure Card and select 30x10G+8x100G/2X400G/
FLEX->2X400G from the drop down. Click Submit and accept modifications.
<Ci>-<Si>-1 page Click ODUC4k-<Ci>-<Si>-1-0 and then click Create channel.
Select bit rate as 100G, enter the 'Source and Sink Tributary Port Number', select
twelve 'Source Tributary Slot' and twelve 'Sink Tributary Slot' for each channel.
4. Create ODU connections for 100GE ports P4 to P11 with OTUC4 port P1.
2WAY, Source ODU and Destination ODU.
b. The Source ODU and Destination ODU selection for twelve ODU connections is
given in the table as ODUC1 Connections on HCPSLine34.
lost.
417

18.18 Test CEF-5 card

This procedure helps you perform the traffic testing on CEF-5 Ethernet interfaces.
Before you start


18.18.1 Procedure for testing CEF-5 card interfaces in L2

mode
Perform the following steps for testing Ethernet traffic on CEF-5 card interfaces:
418


2. Insert a working CEF-5 card in supported slot.
3. Connect the Ethernet test set -1 to the port P5 and Ethernet test set -2 to the port
P1 of CEF-5 card as shown in the set up.
4. Connect optical cables between 1G ports and between 10G ports as shown in the
set up .
5. Connect loop back at 1G port P20 and at 10G port P16.
Figure 352: Setup for Testing CEF-5 Card Interfaces
6. In the node UI, perform the following configurations:

a. Configure the card in the 6*10G + 12*1G mode in the UI.
» Go to Inventory > Node Inventory in the navigation pane and click the Slot
number link corresponding to CEF-5 card. Carrier Ethernet Fabric Card page appears.
Click Configure CEF5 Modes, EoS/EoPDH Card Configuration - CEF-5-1-<Slot
number> page appears. Select 6*10G + 12*1G under the drop down menu of
CardPortMode.
b. Admin up the required interfaces.
c. Provision ELINE services.
» Go to L2 Services > ServiceSwitch > Services provisioning > ELINE Services
in the navigation pane and click Add New ELINE Service link. The Provision ELINE
service between interfaces P5-P6, P7-P8, P9-P10, P11-P12, P17-P18, P19-P20, P1-
P2, P3-P4, and P15-P16.
419

7. Now feed the traffic from the Ethernet test set -1 to the interface P5 and from
Ethernet test set -2 to the interface P1.
8. Monitor these frames on Ethernet test set from interfaces P1 and P5, and record
the data in Test performance- CEF-5 card table.
9. Verify that there are no frame drops in the traffic received.
Table 55: Test performance - CEF-5 card
Port Number Tx Count Rx Count Dropped Count

(Frames) (Frames) (Frames)
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P9
P10
P11
P12
P15
P16
P17
P18
P19
P20
18.19 Test OFA card

420



18.19.2 Testing procedure

Follow the procedure to test the optical interface on OFA card:
1. The test setup requires an OFA card and a +23dBm Power meter.
2. Measure input power to the OFA card with power meter. Ensure it is between 0 and
-10 dBm.
3. Feed input power to the Rx port of OFA card.
4. Measure output power of OFA by connecting the Power meter to the Tx end of the
same interface on OFA card to be tested.
5. Monitor the power on the Tx end by using the Power meter. Difference between the
amplifier input power in dBm and output power in dBm gives actual gain achieved
by the amplifier which appears in the UI.
6. Ensure that the output power (dBm) [addition of Input Power and Gain] is within
+/- 1dB
For example, for OFA-C-S17-FG card,
If Input power = -10 dBm, Gain = 23 dB, then Output power = -10 + 23 = 13
dBm.
Note 1: In case of very high output power, the Power meter is connected to the
Monitor port on OFA card.
In this case, the Output power (dBm) = Input power + Gain - (~20 dB).
Note 2: Similar procedure should be followed for testing other optical ports on OFA
card.
18.20 Test OPM card

421




Follow the procedure to test the OPM cards:
Note: The procedure is applicable to test the OPM-4-C-50G, OPM-2-C-50G, and

OPM-4-C-FLX cards.

2. Insert a working OPM card and MDU card along with Adapter cards HCPADP01 and
HCPADP02.
3. Insert a working MDU card in supported slot.
4. Make the connections as shown in the setup.
422

Figure 353: Test OPM card
5. In the node UI, perform the following steps to enable the Tx and Rx of Monitoring
port on the OFA connected to OPM port.
a. Go to Inventory > Shelf-1 and Click the MDU card. Multiplexer-
Demultiplexer Card page appears.
b. Click Common <port>. Common <port> page appears.
c. Select the Tx OPM Monitoring and Rx OPM Monitoring as Enable.
d. Select the Tx Monitoring Port and Rx Monitoring Port from the drop down.
e. Click Submit. Successful message appears.
To test OPM-4-C-FLX, an additional step is required to create channel group with

Start and End frequency. For more details, refer TJ1600 Product Family User
Interface Guide.
6. Feed input power to the Rx port of OFA card. On Common <port> page Click the
link Click Here against the View Tx Channels Power/View Rx Channels
Power to view the Channel Power and OSNR.
Note: To view the OSNR values, License must be enabled in node UI.
18.21 Test Variable Optical Attenuator (VOA) card

423



18.21.2 Testing Procedure

Follow the procedure to test the optical interface on VOA card:
1. The test setup requires an VOA card and a +23dBm Power meter.
2. Measure input power to the VOA card with power meter. Ensure it is between 0 and
-10 dBm.
3. Feed input power to the Rx port of VOA card.
4. Measure output power of VOA by connecting the Power meter to the Tx end of the
same interface on VOA card to be tested.
5. Monitor the power on the Tx end by using the Power meter. Difference between the
amplifier input power in dBm and output power in dBm gives actual gain achieved
by the amplifier which appears in the UI.
6. Ensure that the output power (dBm) [addition of Input Power and Gain] is within
+/- 1dB
For example,
If Input power = -10 dBm, Gain = 23 dB, then Output power = -10 + 23 = 13
dBm.
18.22 Test OADM card

This procedure helps you perform the traffic testing on OADM-4-D card.

• Ensure that you have a variable attenuator.
424




Follow the procedure to test the optical interface on OADM-4-D card:
Note: Ensure that the power to DWDM XFPs receivers is less than -10dBm.
1. The testing setup requires two HCPSLine03 cards.
Consider one card as line side card and other as client side card.
2. In one HCPSLine03 card, Insert four DWDM XFPs (or tunable XFPs) corresponding
to the 4 channels of OADM-4-D card.
3. In other HCPSLine03 card, Insert four 10km XFPs.
4. Create a cross-connect between Port 1-Port 1 of the two HCPSLine03 cards. Simi-
larly, create cross-connects between Port 2-Port 2, Port 3-Port 3 and Port 4-Port 4
of the two cards.
5. Insert 15 dB attenuator on each DWDM XFP Rx.
6. Create a tandem connection on client side HCPSLine03 card with the Tester as
shown in the figure.
7. Feed the traffic from the tester and ensure 0 bit errors.
8. Note down the Tx and Rx power of DWDM XFP in the UI.
425

Ensure that (Tx power - Rx Power -15 ) < 7 dB
For example, if Tx power = +2dBm and Rx power = -19dBm, then 2- (-19)-15 =

6dB
Figure 354: Testing OADM-4-D card
Note: Similar procedure should be followed for testing OADM-1-D.
18.23 Test MDU-16CL-C-50G and ROADM-4-C-50G

cards

426




Follow this procedure to test the MDU-16CL-C-50G, and ROADM-4-C-50G cards.
1. The test set up requires a HCPSLine22, MDU-16CL-C-50G and ROADM-4-C-50G
cards.
2. Connect the Test Set 1 to the port P6 on HCPSLine22 card.
3. Loopback at port P6 of HCPSLine22 card.
4. Connect port P2 on HCPSLine22 card to one channel on MDU-16CL-C-50G.
Note: Identify the wavelength and then connect to the corresponding

channels on MDU-16CL-50G unit.
5. Connect the Tx and the Rx of Common on MDU-16CL-C-50G to the Rx and Tx of

Add/Drop port 1 on ROADM-4-C-50G respectively.
6. Provide a loopback on Common of ROADM-4-C-50G. The overall setup is as fol-
lows:
427

Figure 355: Setup for Testing MDU-16CL-C-50G and ROADM-4-C-50G cards
7. Define the wavelength/frequency for the channel on MDU-16CL-C-50G.

8. Define the port connect between HCPSLine22, MDU-16CL-C-50G and ROADM-4-C-
50G in the node UI as follows:
— Bidirectional port connect between P1 of HCPSLine22 and channel on MDU-16CL-C-
50G.
— Bidirectional port connect between Common of MDU-16CL-C-50G to Add/Drop port 1
on ROADM-4-C-50G.
9. Configure bidirectional lambda connections between channel on MDU-16CL-C-50G
to Common on ROADM-2-C-50G.
10. Set required gain on OFA to compensate the losses on CLMDU and ROADM.
11. Feed the STM-64 traffic 10GE traffic from the Test Set to the interface P6 of HCPS-
Line22 card.
12. Monitor the Rx signal from P6 of HCPSLine22 card and verify that there are no
frame drops in the fed traffic.
13. Repeat the procedure for different interfaces of MDU-16CL-C-50G and ROADM-4-
C-50G.
This system testing procedure can also be performed for different versions of ROADM
cards namely ROADM-8-C-50G.
18.24 Test MDU-2x16CL-C, ROADM-8-C, and

ROADM-9-C cards

428




Follow this procedure to test the MDU-2x16CL-C, ROADM-8-C, and ROADM-9-C cards.
1. The test set up requires a HCPSLine22, MDU-2x16CL-C, ROADM-8-C, and ROADM-
9-C cards.
2. Connect the Test Set 1 to the port P6 on HCPSLine22 card.
3. Connect port P1 on HCPSLine22 card to one channel on MDU-2x16CL-C.

channels on MDU-2x16CL-C unit.
4. Connect the Tx and the Rx of Common on MDU-2x16CL-C to the Rx and Tx of Add/

Drop port 1 on ROADM-8-C or ROADM-9-C respectively.
5. Provide a loopback on common of ROADM-8-C or ROADM-9-C. The overall setup is
as follows:
429

Figure 356: Setup for Testing MDU-2x16CL-C and ROADM-8-C cards
Figure 357: Setup for Testing MDU-2x16CL-C and ROADM-9-C cards
6. Define the wavelength/frequency for the channel on MDU-2x16CL-C.

7. Define the port connect between HCPSLine22, MDU-2x16CL-C and ROADM-8-C or
ROADM-9-C in the node UI as follows:
— Bidirectional port connect between P1 of HCPSLine22 and channel on MDU-2x16CL-C.
— Bidirectional port connect between Common of MDU-2x16CL-C to Add/Drop port 1 on
ROADM-8-C or ROADM-9-C.
8. Configure bidirectional lambda connections between channel on MDU-2x16CL-C to
Common on ROADM-8-C or ROADM-9-C.
9. Set required gain on OFA to compensate the losses on CLMDU and ROADM.
10. Feed the STM-64 traffic 10GE traffic from the Test Set to the interface P6 of HCPS-
Line22 card.
11. Monitor the Rx signal from P6 of HCPSLine22 card and verify that there are no
frame drops in the fed traffic.
430

12. Repeat the procedure for different interfaces of MDU-2x16CL-C and ROADM-8-C
or ROADM-9-C.
This system testing procedure can also be performed for different versions of ROADM
cards namely ROADM-8-C-50G.
18.25 Test MDU-40E-C-100G, MDU-40O-C-100G

and ILU-C-50G cards




Follow this procedure to test the MDU-40E-C-100G, MDU-40O-C-100G and ILU-C-50G
cards; the setup uses two ILU cards which have been given suffix 1 and 2 for the
purpose of distinction.
1. The test set up requires HCPSLine03 card, MDU-40E-C-100G, MDU-40O-C-100G
and ILU-C-50G cards.
2. Connect the Test Set 1 to the port 1 and Test Set 2 to the port 2 of HCPSLine03
card.
3. Connect port 3 of HCPSline03 to one Channel of MDU-40E-C-100G and port 4 of
HCPSLine03 to one Channel of MDU-40O-C-100G.
431


channels on MDU-40E-C-100G and MDU-40O-C-100G.
4. Connect Tx of Common on MDU-40E-C-100G to Even port of In/Out port on ILU-C-

50G (1) and similarly the Tx of Common on MDU-40O-C-100G to Odd port of In/
Out port on ILU-C-50G (1).
5. Connect Even port of In/Out port on ILU-C-50G (2) to Rx Common on MDU-40E-C-
100G. Similarly, connect Odd port of In/Out port on ILU-C-50G (2) to the Rx Com-
mon port of MDU-40O-C-100G.
6. Connect Common on ILU-C-50G (1) to Rx of OFA and Tx of same port on OFA to
Common on ILU-C-50G (2). The OFA version required to be used depends on the
output power and the distance of transmission. Based on the power requirement, a
second OFA can also be added but the output power from the first OFA must be
within the threshold limit of second OFA. The output power is measured using Opti-
cal Power Meter (OPM). In case of dispersion compensation, use DCM before con-
necting to OFA.
432

The overall setup diagram is as follows.

Figure 358: Setup: HCPSLine03, MDU40E-D, MDU40O-D, and ILU-C-50G cards
7. Configure HCPSLine03 in intracard transponder/muxponder mode.

8. Define the port connect between HCPSLine03, MDU-40E-C-100G, MDU-40O-C-
100G and ILU-C-50G in the node UI as follows:
— Bidirectional port connect between port 3 on HCPSLine03 and the Channel on MDU-
40E-C-100G
— Bidirectional port connect between port 4 on HCPSLine03 and the Channel on MDU-
40O-C-100G
— Unidirectional port connect between Tx of Common of MDU-40E-C-100G to Even
interface of ILU-C-50G (1)
— Unidirectional port connect between Tx of Common of MDU-40O-C-100G to Odd
interface of ILU-C-50G (1)
— Unidirectional port connect between Even interface of In/Out port on ILU-C-50G (2) to
Rx of Common on MDU-40E-C-100G
— Unidirectional port connect between Odd interface of In/Out Port of ILU-C-50G (2) to
Rx of Common on MDU-40O-C-100G
— Unidirectional port connect between Common of ILU-C-50G (1) to Rx of OFA
— Unidirectional port connect between Tx of OFA to Common of ILU-C-50G (2)
9. Feed the STM-64/OC-192 traffic from the Test Set 1 and 10GE traffic from the Test
Set 2 to port 1 and port 2 respectively on HCPSLine03 card.
10. Monitor the traffic on Test Set 1 and 2 and verify that there are no frame drops in
the traffic feed.
11. Make the physical connections accordingly and repeat the procedure for different
channels of MDU-40E-C-100G and MDU-40O-C-100G.
This system testing procedure can also be performed using other card options for the
given setup;
433

• HCPSLine08 card in place of HCPSLine03 card.
• Any available version of OFA card can be used in the given setup, for example,
OFA-C-S20-VG, OFA-C-D20-VG, OFA-C-D20-HG, OFA-C-S20-LG and OFA-C-D20-
LG.
18.26 Test MDU-96-C-50G card




Follow this procedure to test the MDU-96-C-50G card; the setup uses two MDU96 cards
which have been given suffix 1 and 2 for the purpose of distinction.
1. The test set up requires HCPSLine03 and MDU-96-C-50G cards.
2. Connect the Test Set 1 to the port 1 and Test Set 2 to the port 2 of HCPSLine03
card.
3. Connect port 3 of HCPSline03 to one Channel of MDU-96-C-50G (1) and port 4 of
HCPSLine03 to one Channel of MDU-96-C-50G (2).
4. Connect the Common port on MDU-96-C-50G to Rx of a port on an OFA card and Tx
of the same port on the OFA card to the Common port on MDU-96-C-50G (2).
Note: The OFA version required to be used depends on the output power and the
distance of transmission. Based on the power requirement, a second OFA can also
be added but the output power from the first OFA must be within the threshold limit
of second OFA. The output power is measured using Optical Power Meter (OPM). In
case of dispersion compensation, use DCM before connecting to OFA.
434

The overall setup diagram is as follows.

Figure 359: Test MDU-64-D
5. Configure HCPSLine03 in intracard transponder/muxponder mode.

6. Define the port connect between HCPSLine03 and MDU-96-C-50G in the node UI as
follows:
— Bidirectional port connect between port 3 on HCPSLine03 and the Channel on MDU-96-
C-50G
C-50G
— Unidirectional port connect between Tx of Common of MDU-96-C-50G (1) to Rx of OFA
port 1
— Unidirectional port connect between Rx of Common of MDU-96-C-50G (2) to Tx of OFA
port 1
— Unidirectional port connect between Tx of Common of MDU-96-C-50G (2) to Rx of OFA
port 2
— Unidirectional port connect between Rx of Common of MDU-96-C-50G (1) to Rx of OFA
port 2
7. Feed the STM-64/OC-192 traffic from the Test Set 1 and 10GE traffic from the Test
Set 2 to port 1 and port 2 respectively on HCPSLine03 card.
8. Monitor the traffic on Test Set 1 and 2 and verify that there are no frame drops in
the traffic feed.
9. This system testing procedure can also be performed using other card options for
the ealier given setup;
435

— HCPSLine08 card in place of HCPSLine03 card.

— Any available version of OFA card can be used in the given setup, for example, OFA-C-
S20-VG, OFA-C-D20-VG, OFA-C-D20-HG, OFA-C-S20-LG, OFA-C-D20-LG, OFA-C-S20-
LVG, OFA-C-D20-LVG, and OFA-C-D20-MVG
18.27 Test MDU8-D card




Follow this procedure to test the HCPSLine03 and MDU8-D; the setup uses two MDU8-D
cards.
3. Connect the Test set to the port 1 of HCPSLine03 card.
4. Connect port 3 of HCPSLine03 to one channel of MDU8-D and port 4 of HCPSLine03
to one Channel of MDU8-D.
5. Loopback at port 2.

channels on MDU8-D.
6. Connect Tx of Common on one MDU8-D to Rx of other MDU8-D card.

436

Figure 360: Setup for Testing HCPSLine03 and MDU8-D cards
7. Configure HCPSLine03 in SDH GATEWAY card mode.
Go to Inventory > Node Inventory in the navigation pane on the node GUI and
Click the Slot number link corresponding to HCPSLine01 card. HCPULine01 Port
Group Card page appears. Click Configure Card, the Card configuration -
HCPSLine03-1-<Slot number> page appears. Select SDH GATEWAY card
under the drop down menu of Card Configuration.
8. Provision cross-connects between port 1 and port 3, port 2 and port 4 in the node
UI.
Go to Configuration > Cross-Connect, the Configure Cross-connects page

capacity with 'Source Port' as port 1 and 'Destination Port' as port 3. Similarly,
create other cross-connects of VC4_64c capacity with 'Source Port' as port 2 and
'Destination Port' as port 4.
9. Define the port connect between HCPSLine03 and MDU8-D in the node UI as fol-
lows:
— Bidirectional port connect between port 3 on HCPSLine03 and the Channel on MDU8-D
(1)
— Bidirectional port connect between port 4 on HCPSLine03 and the Channel on MDU8-D
(2)
— Bidirectional port connect between Common of MDU8-D (1) to Common of MDU8-D (2)
10. Feed the STM-64 traffic from the Test Set to port 1 on HCPSLine03 card.
11. Monitor the traffic on Test Set and verify that there are no frame drops in the traf-
fic feed.
437

channels of MDU8-D.
18.28 Test MDU-16-D card




Follow this procedure to test the HCPSLine03 and MDU-16-D; the setup uses two MDU-
16-D cards.
3. Connect the test set to the port 1 of HCPSLine03 card.
4. Connect port 3 of HCPSLine03 to one channel of MDU-16-D and port 4 of HCPS-
Line03 to one channel of MDU-16-D.

channels on MDU-16-D.
6. Connect Tx of Common on one MDU-16-D to Rx of other MDU-16-D card.

438

Figure 361: Setup for testing HCPSLine03 and MDU-16-D cards
FlexiCard under the drop down menu of Card Configuration. Click Submit and accept
modifications.
menu of Timing Transparent Mode parameter. Similarly, configure for port P2. Click
Capacity as ODU2, enter the name of Circuit Identifier, Directionality as 2WAY,
Source ODU as port P1 (ODU2k-<Chassis>-<slot>-<port>-0) and Destination
ODU as port P3 (ODU2k-<Chassis>-<slot>-<port>-0). Similarly, create ODU
connections between port P2 and port P4. Click Submit and accept modifications.
9. Define the port connect between HCPSLine03 and MDU-16-D in the node UI as fol-
lows:
D (1)
D (2)
— Bidirectional port connect between Common of MDU-16-D (1) to Common of MDU-16-D
(2)
fic feed.
439

channels of MDU-16-D.
18.29 Test MDU-64-D card




Follow this procedure to test the HCPSLine03 and MDU-64-D; the setup uses two MDU-
64-D cards.
3. Connect the Test set to the port 1 of HCPSLine03 card.
4. Connect port 3 of HCPSLine03 to one channel of MDU-64-D and port 4 of HCPS-
Line03 to one channel of MDU-64-D.

channels on MDU-64-D.
6. Connect Tx of Common on one MDU-64-D to Rx of other MDU-64-D card.

440

FlexiCard under the drop down menu of Card Configuration. Click Submit and
menu of Timing Transparent Mode parameter. Similarly configure for port P2. Click
Capacity as ODU2, enter the name of Circuit Identifier, Directionality as
2WAY, Source ODU as port P1 (ODU2k-<Chassis>-<slot>-<port>-0) and
Destination ODU as port P3 (ODU2k-<Chassis>-<slot>-<port>-0). Similarly,
create ODU connections between port P2 and port P4. Click Submit and accept
modifications.
9. Define the port connect between HCPSLine03 and MDU-64-D in the node UI as fol-
lows:
D (1)
D (2)
— Bidirectional port connect between Common of MDU-64-D (1) to Common of MDU-64-D
(2)
fic feed.
channels of MDU-64-D.
18.30 Test PSCM

441




2. Insert two working HCPSLine22 cards in supported slots of the node and install the
PSCM separately as it is a standalone unit.
3. Connect the Test set to the common port of PSCM unit.
4. Connect the optical fiber between ports of PSCM and HCPSLine22 as shown in the
following setup diagram.
Figure 362: Testing PSCM
5. Loop back at port P1 of HCPSLine22 card.
442


a. Configure the HCPSLine22 cards in the 5 10G TRANSPONDER card mode.
b. Create transponder connections between ports P6 and P1 for both HCPSLine22
cards.
pane appears. Click Create a new Transponder/Muxponder link. Select the Type
as transponder, Network Port as OTU2 and Client Port as port P6 from drop down
menu and click Create.
c. Configure Y-cable protection.
» Go to OTN > ODU Path Linear Protection > Provision ODU Path Linear
Protection and Click Provision a new ODU Path Linear Protection. The
Provision New ODU Path Linear Protection page appears. Select Architecture
as 1+1withoutAPSbytes, Protection Scheme as Y-Cable protection and
Monitoring Type as Client NonIntrusive. Select the capacity as ODU2, Work
ODU as port P6 of HCPSLine22 (1) card and Protect ODU as port P6 of HCPSLine22
(2) card. Click Create.
7. Feed and monitor the STM-64 traffic from the Test set to the COM port on PSCM
card. Verify that no frames are lost. The same procedure to be followed for other
client capacities.
18.31 Test FPU01/FPU02 card

This procedure helps you perform the traffic testing on FPU01 card.

443




Follow this procedure to test the optical interface on FPU01 card:
1. The test setup requires a FPU01 card.
2. Connect the Tx and Rx ends of Test Set to the Common in and Common out ports
on FPU01 card, respectively.
3. Provide physical loopbacks on Work port and Protect port respectively, as shown in
the following figure:
444

Figure 363: Testing FPU01 card
4. Feed the traffic from the Test Set and ensure no bit errors are reported.
5. The LED status on the FPU01 card indicates the active traffic path. Ensure Work
LED is Green and Protect LED is Amber.
6. Now induce a signal failure on the work path.
7. Ensure that the traffic is switched to protect path and is up.
8. Check the LED status on FPU01 card. Work LED is Red and Protect LED is Green.
The FPU switched to protect alarm is raised in the active alarm page.
9. After restoring the work path, the LED status is Green for protect and Amber for
the work path. The traffic may switch back to the work path after WTR if FPU in
revertive mode. Now, induce a signal fail on the protect path. Traffic switches to
work path.
Note: For testing switching due to external commands, induce a forced switch.
Ensure that the switching time in less than 50msec.
18.32 Test OTDR and OTDR filter card

This procedure helps you perform the traffic testing on OTDR and OTDR filter card.

445




Follow the procedure to test the OTDR and OTDR filter cards:
1. The test set up requires a OTDR, OTDR filter cards.
2. Insert OTDR card, OTDR filter card along with ADP02 card.
3. Connect the fiber between OTDR port to OTDR filter port.
4. Set the parameters on the OTDR card as per the requirement.
5. Trigger a manual scan. The file is generated.
6. View the scan result.
Test set up for testing OTDR and OTDR filter cards is as follows:
Figure 364: Testing OTDR and OTDR filter cards
446

19 Record data and test results
This appendix provides various forms to record system data and test results during the
commissioning process. These forms must be filled and completed once you complete
the tests during the node commissioning process.
19.1 Site verification checklist

Table 56: Site verification checklist
Site verification Status (Yes/ Measurements

Sl.No checkpoints No) (Mts) Remarks
1 Is the existing rack width in

line with the standard
measurements details (19",
21", 23")?
If yes, is there a clearance for
equipment with existing rack?
2 Can the existing room

accommodate new racks?
If no, has a recommendation
been done to the customer or
any alternative method
suggested?
Has the suggestions /
recommendations recorded in
the Remarks column?
3 Are the rack and equipments Please

shipped to site? Are these provide the
available to Tejas for flooring
installation and details
commissioning? • False
flooring
• Non false
flooring
4 Is the AC/DC power supply at

the site being evaluated?
447


5 Is the DC power cable and

the ground cable extended till
the rack?
If no, has a suggestion /
recommendation been
communicated?
This should be recorded in
the Remarks column
6 Is there adequate distance << Record the

between DCDB and rack for measurement
extension of power cables? here >>
If no, has a suggestion or
recommendation been
communicated?
This has to be recorded in the
Remarks column

between ground point and measurement
the rack? here >>
If no, has a suggestion or
recommendation been
communicated?
Has this been recorded in the
Remarks column?
8 Is rectifier available at site

and is powered on?
9 Is there an FDF available at

the site?

between the FDF and the measurement
equipment for fiber patch here >>
chords?
If the site is already a DWDM site and further upgrade is required
11 Is it a terminal node? or
Inline Amplifier (ILA) node?
448

Record data and test results

12 Is this a DWDM node with

traffic coming from multiple
directions?
If yes, identify the racks for
each direction.
13 Identify the following network

elements for each direction:
• MUX and DEMUX units
with supported channels
• DCM units and their
supported dispersion
length
• Amplifier nodes/cards and
their rating
• DWDM channels used
• DWDM channels free
14 For all earlier mentioned

nodes, note the required type
of patch cords OR identify the
fiber distribution panels.
15 Is the labeling on fibers clear,

understand the notation?
16 If the fiber is already routed,

measure and ensure that all
fiber patch cords are good by
measuring the loss of the
cable.
17 Verify the capacity of existing

DC-DC converter capacity
and record the requirements.
Note: If it is a new installation (DWDM), provision the rack space for all earlier
mentioned nodes.
449

19.2 Commission and test report

Table 57: Report details of commissioning and testing
Item Details
Product description
Name of the customer
Location
Ethernet IP
Router ID
Representative name
Signature
Customer
representative name
Signature
Date
19.3 Receiver sensitivity measurement for STM-1

Table 58: Receiver sensitivity measurement for STM-1
Parameter Laser type Spec
Tx output power (dBm) S1.1 -8 to -15

L1.1 0 to -5
L1.2 0 to -5
Receiver sensitivity S1.1 -8 to -28
(dBm)
L1.1 -10 to -34
L1.2 -10 to -34
19.4 Receiver sensitivity measurement for STM-4

Parameter Laser Type Spec
Tx output power S4.1 -8 to -15

(dBm)
L4.1 +2 to -3
L4.2 +2 to -3
450

Receiver Sensitivity S4.1 -8 to -28

(dBm)
L4.1 -8 to -28
L4.2 -8 to -28
19.5 Receiver sensitivity measurement for STM-

16
Tx output power (dBm) S16.1 0 to -5

L16.1 +3 to -2
L16.2 +3 to -2
Receiver Sensitivity S16.1 -18 to 0
(dBm)
L16.1 -27 to -9
L16.2 -28 to -9
19.6 Receiver sensitivity measurement for STM-

64/10G
Tx output power S64.1 +1 to +5

(dBm)
I64.1 -1 to -6
Receiver sensitivity S64.1 -1 to -11
(dBm)
I64.1 -1 to -11
Table 62: Receiver sensitivity measurement for STM-64/10G
Tx output power L64.2a -2 to +2

(dBm) (ITU-T G.722)
P1L1-2D2 0 to +4
(ITU-T G.959.1)
451

Table 62: Receiver sensitivity measurement for STM-64/10G
Receiver sensitivity L64.2a -9 to -26

(dBm) (ITU-T G.722)
P1L1-2D2 0 to -24
(ITU-T G.959.1)
19.7 Receiver sensitivity measurement for 1G

Table 63: Receiver sensitivity measurements for 1G
Tx output power (dBm) 1000BASE-ZX (80Km -2 to +3

Typ)
1000BASE-LX (40km Typ) -4.5 to 0
Receiver sensitivity 1000BASE-ZX (80km Typ) -3 to -24
(dBm)
1000BASE-LX (40Km Typ) 0 to -22.5
19.8 Receiver sensitivity measurement for 10G

Table 64: Receiver sensitivity measurement for 10G
Tx output power (dBm) L64.2a (ITU-T G.722) -1 to -6

P1L1-2D2 (ITU.T G.959.1) 0 to +4
Receiver sensitivity L64.2a (ITU-T G.722) 0 to -11
(dBm)
P1L1-2D2 (ITU.T G.959.1) 0 to -24
Receiver sensitivity measurement for 100G

Table 65: Receiver sensitivity measurement for 100G
Tx output power 100GBase-SR10/OTU4 -7.6 to 2.4

(dBm) (100m)
100GBase-LR4/OTU4 3.5 to 8.9
(10km)
Receiver sensitivity 100GBase-SR10/OTU4 -9.4 to -5.4
(dBm) (100m)
100GBase-LR4/OTU4 -10.6 to 4.5
(10km)
452

Table 66: Receiver sensitivity measurement for 100G (DWDM)
Tx output power 5’x7’ MSA DP-QPSK -5 to 1

(dBm) Coherent
CFP Coherent -1 to 3
Receiver sensitivity 5’x7’ MSA DP-QPSK -18 to -2

(dBm) Coherent
CFP Coherent -18 to -2
Synchronization tests
Table 67: Synchronization tests
Clock Status
STM-1/4/16/64
BITS clock, BITS data
Internal
Hold over
19.9 Protection switching on fiber breaks, STM

LOS
Table 68: Protection switching on fiber breaks, STM LOS
STM protection switching
Work to protect
Protect to work
453

20 General procedures
This chapter describes the procedures to be followed when cleaning and inspecting
optical and fiber connectors; the SFP replacement process. It also describes the
procedure to be followed during inserting and ejecting of cards and FTUs.
Note: Always clean the fiber-optic connectors before connecting to the transmission
equipment, test equipment, patch panels, or other connectors.
20.1 Guidelines for cleaning optical fiber

connectors
It is important to keep all interconnects as clean as possible. Since the single-mode fiber
has a light-carrying core with diameter less than 10 micro meters, even a single
microscopic speck of dust on the connector end can significantly attenuate the light
traveling through the fiber. Clean connections are required for accurate and repeatable
measurements. Leave the protective dust covers on the connectors when they are not in
use.
Observe the following guidelines to achieve the best performance:
• Visually inspect fiber ends to locate any signs of damage.
• Use dry connections whenever possible.
• Keep connectors covered when not in use.

For more information on cleaning procedure, refer to Clean optical fiber connectors.
CAUTION: Improper cleaning may result in high attenuation due to dirt

or dust or may cause mechanical damage to the fiber end, resulting in performance
degradation. While handling an optical fiber, do not exceed the minimum bed radius
(35 mm). Do not over tighten the cable tie wraps while dressing the cable.
455

DANGER: Do not look into the end of fiber-optic connectors or into faceplate
connectors of installed circuit packs. The light source used in fiber-optic devices can
damage your eyes.
20.2 Inspect fiber connectors

To inspect the fiber connectors, do the following steps:
• Verify whether the other end of the fiber is disconnected from its laser source.
• Visually inspect all fiber-optic connections before use. A minimum magnification of

200X is required for proper inspection.
• Inspect the end of the fiber face with the optical fiber scope. Compare with
following figure to determine the condition of the fiber end face. If you need to
clean or polish the end face, refer to Clean optical fiber connectors.
Figure 365: Fiber intersection
Following table provides the recommended actions for different conditions of fiber
connectors.
Table 69: Recommended actions for conditions of fiber connectors
Fiber end-face condition Recommendation/Action
Ideal No action required

Light scratches Polish with 0.3 micron film
Heavy scoring or scratches Repolish the face
Chip outside the fiber core Repolish the face
Chipped core Unacceptable; reject the connector
456

General procedures
Table 69: Recommended actions for conditions of fiber connectors
Fiber end-face condition Recommendation/Action
Rough surface Repolish the face
Dirt or debris Clean or repolish the surface
Chipped face Unacceptable; reject the connector
Cracked fiber Unacceptable; reject the connector
Broken fiber Unacceptable; reject the connector
20.3 Clean optical fiber connectors

Follow the methods described in this section to clean the optical fiber connectors.
Note: Ensure that the power/light source is turned off before and during the
cleaning of optical interfaces.
OPTICAL SAFETY: Do not stare or look directly into the

optical connector output beam, as this can cause irreparable damage to your eyes
and even loss of eye sight.
20.3.1 Clean with lint-free wipes

Do the following steps to clean optical fiber connectors using lint-free wipes:
1. Fold the lint-free tissue paper into a square of about 4 to 8 layers thick.
Note: Use only fresh and lint-free tissue papers for cleaning. Do not use
normal tissue paper or anything unauthorized.
2. Apply 1 to 3 drops of fresh 99% isopropyl alcohol to one end of the tissue paper.
Shake off the excess amount of alcohol.
3. Hold the fiber by the connector or cable.
4. Place the wet portion of the tissue paper on the optical surface and slowly drag it
across.
Note: Do not retrace the cleaning path.
5. Immediately dry the optical surface with a clean, dry, and lint-free tissue paper.
6. Place the dust cap over the end of the interface to avoid re-contamination or insert
the fiber for immediate use.
7. Dispose the tissue paper properly. Do not reuse tissue papers.
457

20.3.2 Clean connectors with swabs

Do the following steps to clean optical fiber connectors using swabs:
1. Apply 1 to 3 drops of fresh 99% isopropyl alcohol on the cleaning bud.
2. Gently insert wet cleaning bud into the connector and rotate it in a clockwise direc-
tion. Repeat the motion 2 to 3 times.
3. Immediately place the dust cap over the connector to avoid re-contamination or
insert the fiber for immediate use.
4. Dispose the swab properly. Do not reuse cleaning swab.
Note: Always use a fresh cleaning swab (cleaning bud) for cleaning connectors.
20.3.3 Clean with dry compressed air

Do the following steps to clean optical fiber connectors using dry compressed air:
1. Hold the fiber by the connector or cable.
2. Aim a filtered, dry compressed air dust remover at a shallow angle to the fiber end
face.
3. Blow the compressed air across the fiber end face from a distance of 6 to 8 inches.
4. Verify that the connector is free of dirt by inspecting the fiber optic connector with
a fiberscope.
— If it is clean, cover the connector with a protective dust cover until ready to use.
— If it is not clean, clean using lint-free wipes as mentioned in the procedure Clean with
lint-free wipes.
20.4 Insert and eject the PFU

This section details the insertion and the ejection procedures for the PFU in a TJ1600
node.
CAUTION: Do not insert or remove the PFU with power cable

connected to it. This could damage the unit and also create safety hazards.
connection. All connection must be removed to de-energize the unit before
accessing internal parts for maintenance or service.
458

General procedures
RISK OF PERFORMANCE DEGRADATION: If the PFU is not locked

properly to the chassis, it may result in intermittent failures because of poor
connectivity.

equipment. While handling cards for making system interconnections, wear an ESD
strap to discharge the static buildup.
CAUTION: After a card is removed from the chassis, it should not be

replaced into the system immediately. Wait for at least 5 seconds to ensure that unit
capacitors have discharged.
TJ1600-2 system supports the PFU in slot 3 and slot 4 of the chassis in redundant state
to provide input source redundancy. PFU is provided with a latch handle on front panel
to aid its insertion and ejection from the chassis.
Note: In redundant state, the two slots allotted to the PFU must be occupied by
same PFU type.
Figure 366: Position of PFU in TJ1600 Type-2SR chassis
Prerequisites
Before inserting or ejecting the PFU, ensure that:
459

• A replacement PFU is present.
• You have a precision screwdriver and a manual star screwdriver.
• You are properly grounded to the node by an ESD protective wrist strap.
• If the chassis installed on rack is at a height more than the eye level of a person, a
platform of required height should be used for easy access and line of sight.
• Cables routed from left or right have sufficient slack to remove the PFU from the
chassis.
Insert the PFU
Perform the following steps to insert a PFU into the chassis:

1. Face towards front of the chassis and identify the slot where the PFU has to be
inserted.
— If the PFU is already present in the desired slot, but needs to be replaced, first remove
that unit from the chassis; then go to step 3. For procedure, refer to Eject the PFU.
— If the desired slot is empty, directly go to step 3.
3. Hold the PFU (replacement) with proper hand support in a horizontal position
against the empty slot as shown in the following figure. Slide the unit horizontally
along the guide ways provided on the chassis to the point it easily goes into the
chassis.
Figure 367: Sliding PFU into the chassis
4. Hold the latch handle and gently push the PFU into the chassis to engage it to the
backplane connector.
5. Secure the PFU to the chassis by tightening the captive screws present on both
sides of the front panel of the unit using Phillips (PH1) star screwdriver.
460

General procedures
Figure 368: Tightening captive screws on PFU
Eject the PFU
Perform the following steps to eject a PFU from the chassis:

1. Face towards front of the chassis and identify the slot from where the PFU has to be
removed.
2. Turn off the power supply to the PFU desired to be removed. Wait for about 15 sec-
onds for the residual stored energy to discharge.
3. Verify that the power LED on the PFU is turned Off.
4. Loosen the two captive screws securing the power feed cable to the chassis using a
precision screwdriver. The screws should be loose enough to allow the cable to be
unplugged.
5. Disconnect/unplug the power feed cable by gently pulling out the cable connector
from the interface.
6. Loosen the two captive screws present on both sides of the front panel of the PFU
using Phillips (PH1) star screwdriver. The screws should be loose enough to allow
the unit to be ejected from the chassis.
461

Figure 369: Loosening captive screws on PFU
7. Hold the latch handle and gently pull out the PFU to disengage it from the back-
plane connector.
8. Slide the PFU along the guide ways provided on the chassis with proper hand sup-
port till it comes out of the slot.
462

General procedures
Figure 370: Sliding the PFU out from the chassis
20.5 Insert and eject the FTU

This section details the insertion and the ejection procedures for the FTU in a TJ1600
node.
Note: Ensure that the FTU is not removed before the replacement unit is available.
Also ensure that the FTU replacement procedure is completed within 30 seconds
time.
CAUTION: The fans might still be turning when you remove the fan
assembly from the chassis. Keep fingers, screwdrivers, and other objects away from
the openings in the fan assembly housing.
RISK OF PERFORMANCE DEGRADATION: Failure to fasten the

face plate to the chassis may result in intermittent failures because of poor
connectivity.
463

TJ1600-2 system supports the FTU in slot 6 of the chassis. FTU is located on front,
towards left view of the chassis. FTU is provided with a handle on front panel that aid in
its insertion and removal from the chassis.
Figure 371: Position of FTU on TJ1600 Type-2SR chassis
FTU is designed to support redundancy mode, where each unit consists of two fans. An
alarm is raised if any of the fan fails. The system works up to 40°C in case of single fan
failure. Also, the system works even if alarm exists on the FTU and the room
temperature is less than 40°C, unless the 2nd fan failure happens. It is required to
change the fan if the alarm exists on the FTU.
Prerequisites
Before inserting or ejecting the FTU, ensure that:
• A replacement FTU is present.
• You have a Phillips screwdriver.
• Cables routed from right or left have sufficient slack to remove the FTU from the
chassis.
Insert the FTU
Perform the following steps to insert a FTU into the chassis:

1. Face towards front of the chassis and identify the slot where the FTU has to be
inserted.
— If the FTU is already present in the desired slot, but needs to be replaced, first remove
that unit from the chassis; then go to step 3. For procedure, refer to Eject the FTU.
— If the desired slot is empty, directly go to step 3.
3. Hold the FTU (replacement) with proper hand support in a vertical position against
the empty slot as shown in the following figure. Slide the unit horizontally along the
guide ways provided on the chassis to the point it easily goes into the chassis.
464

General procedures
Figure 372: Sliding FTU into the chassis
4. Hold the handle and gently push the FTU into the chassis to engage it to the back-
plane connector.
5. Secure the FTU to the chassis by tightening the captive screw present on top, right
side of the front panel of the unit using Phillips (PH1) star screwdriver.
Figure 373: Tightening captive screw on FTU
Eject the FTU
Perform the following steps to eject a FTU from the chassis:

1. Face towards front of the chassis and identify the slot from where the FTU has to be
removed.
465

2. Loosen the captive screw present on top, right side of the front panel of the unit
using Phillips (PH1) screwdriver. The screw should be loose enough to allow the
card to be removed.
Figure 374: Loosening captive screw on FTU
3. Hold the handle on front panel of the FTU and gently pull out the unit to disengage
it from the backplane connector.
4. Slide the FTU along the guide ways provided on the chassis with proper hand sup-
port till it comes out of the slot.
466

General procedures
Figure 375: Sliding FTU out from the chassis
Insert and eject the air filter
TJ1600-2 system consists of a user-replaceable air filter that traps the dust particles
from air drawn into the chassis and hence allows clean air circulation within the chassis.
Air filter is a Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) located on front, towards chassis left view. It
is provided with a handle on the front panel that aid in its insertion and removal from the
chassis.
Figure 376: Position of air filter on TJ1600 Type-2SR chassis
Air filters must be examined periodically. If the filter appears dirty, it can be either
cleaned by vacuum or replaced. If the filter appears worn or torn, dispose of it in a
responsible manner and install a replacement air filter.
Note: Air filter must be replaced once in every six months.
467

Prerequisites
Before inserting or ejecting the air filter, ensure that:
• A replacement air filter is present.
• The cables routed from left or right have sufficient slack to remove the filter.
Insert the air filter
Perform the following steps to insert an air filter in the chassis:

1. Face towards front of the chassis and identify the slot on chassis where the air filter
is desired to be inserted.
2. Hold the air filter to be installed with proper support and slide in the unit along the
guide ways to the point it easily goes into the chassis. While sliding, position of the
air filter should be vertical with captive screw towards down side, as shown in the
following figure:
468

General procedures
Figure 377: Sliding air filter into the chassis
3. Secure the air filter to the chassis by tightening the captive screw located on the
front panel of the unit with a Phillips (PH1) screwdriver.
469

Figure 378: Tightening captive screw on air filter
Eject the air filter
Perform the following steps to eject the air filter from the chassis:
1. Face towards front of the chassis and identify the slot on chassis where the Air
Filter is desired to be inserted.
2. Loosen the captive screw that secures the air filter to the chassis using Phillips
(PH1) screwdriver. The screw should be loose enough to allow the removal of the
card.
470

General procedures
Figure 379: Loosening captive screw on air filter
3. Hold the handle on front panel of the air filter and slide out the unit completely
from the chassis while supporting it with your other hand.
471

Figure 380: Sliding air filter from the chassis
20.6 Insert and eject cards

This section details the procedure for insertion and ejection of cards on a chassis. The
cards are provided with ejectors or latch handles that aid in their insertion and ejection
from the chassis.

equipment. While unpacking and handling cards, or making node interconnections,
wear a grounding wrist strap to discharge the static buildup.
472

General procedures
CAUTION: If any of the plug-in units or interface modules need to be

inserted or ejected, it is imperative that the following procedures are adopted to
avoid possible damages to the connectors or spring fingers.
20.6.1 Cards with ejectors

The list of cards having 'ejectors' are given in the following:
• Controller card: OSMC01 card
• Line cards: HCPSLine03, HCPSLine08, HCPSLine12, HCPSLine22, HCPSLine24,

HCPSLine25, HCPSLine26, HCPSLine27, HCPSLine28, HCPSLine31, and
HCPSLine32
• Ethernet card: CEF-5
• Optical fiber amplifier cards (OFA)
• ROADM
• MDU-16-CL-50G
• MDU-16-D
• OADM4 and OADM1
Prerequisites
Before inserting or ejecting a card, ensure that:
• You have a Phillips (PH1) screwdriver.
• The cables routed from left or right have sufficient slack to remove the card.
• If the chassis installed on a rack is at a height more that the eye level of the
person, use a platform of the required height for easy access and line of sight.
Insert the card
Perform the following steps to insert a card with ejectors into the chassis:
1. Face the front of the chassis and identify the slot where the card has to be inserted.
2. Slide in the card along the guide ways provided on the chassis with ejectors in hor-
izontal open position to engage them to the chassis groove.
473

Figure 381: Sliding the card into chassis
3. Operate both the ejectors inwards simultaneously to engage the card to the back-
plane.
474

General procedures
Figure 382: Operating ejectors inwards while inserting
4. Secure the card to the chassis by tightening the captive screws located on both
sides of the face plate of the card using Phillips (PH1) screwdriver.
475

Figure 383: Tightening captive screws on card
5. Verify that the status LED on the card is green in color which indicates a proper
jack in.
RISK OF PERFORMANCE DEGRADATION: If a card is not locked

connectivity. Ensure that the pair of ejectors on the card are properly latched/locked
to the faceplate and the captive screws are tightened enough to secure the card on
the chassis.
Eject the card
Perform the following steps to eject a card with ejectors from the chassis:
1. Face the front of the chassis and identify the slot from where the card has to be
ejected.
476

General procedures
Note: In case of ejecting cross connect card, press the RST (Reset) switch till LED
status displays RED color. Release the switch immediately. Sts (Status) LED
displays RED color. During this card goes for booting process. Once the process is
complete, Sts (Status) LED displays RED BLINKING color. This indicates that card
is ready for removal. Now subtended cross connect card becomes main cross
connect card.
2. Disconnect all fibers/cables connected to ports on the card.

3. Loosen the captive screws located on both end of the face plate of the card using
Phillips (PH1) screwdriver. The screws should be loose enough to allow the removal
of card.
Figure 384: Loosening captive screws on card
4. Hold the two ejectors on the face plate of the card and operate them outwards
simultaneously (as shown in the following figure) to disengage the card from the
backplane. Wait till the status LED blinks in "Amber" color before pulling out the
card from chassis.
477

Figure 385: Operating ejectors inwards
5. Slide out the card along the guided ways till it comes out of the slot, while support-
ing it with your other hand.
478

General procedures
Figure 386: Sliding out the card
Note: For HCPSLine08 card, Use Early Ejector option can be enabled or disabled
on the node UI. If it is enabled, releasing the latch on ejector triggers the traffic flow
on the card to stop before the ejector is pulled out and the card is removed from the
backplane. For more details, refer to TJ1600 Product Family User Interface Guide.
479

20.6.2 Cards with latch handles

The list of cards having 'latch handles' are given in the following:
• OAM and Controller card: OAMC
• MDU-6-D
• MDU-8-D
• VOA
• FPU01
• HCPADP01 and HCPADP02
• HCPADP03 and HCPADP04
• Optical Power Monitoring- OPM-2-C and OPM-4-C
Prerequisites
Before inserting or ejecting a card, ensure that:
• If the chassis installed on a rack is at a height more than the eye level of the
Insert the card
Perform the following steps to insert a card with latch handles in the chassis:
2. Install the required Adapter card in the slot.
Note: For inserting FPU01 card into the chassis, the respective adapter card
must be inserted first and then the cards must be inserted into the adapter
card. For inserting adapter card, refer to Insert and eject the adapter card.
3. Now hold the card to be installed into the adapter card with proper support and
slide in along the guide ways. Ensure that the card is inserted in proper slot width.
480

General procedures
Figure 387: Inserting the card
4. Hold the latch handles provided on the front panel of the card and gently push the
card into the chassis to engage it to the backplane connector.
sides of the front panel of the card using Phillips screwdriver.
481

Figure 388: Tightening captive screws on the card
6. Verify that the status LED on the card is green in color which indicates a proper
insertion.
RISK OF PERFORMANCE DEGRADATION: If a card is not locked

connectivity. Ensure that the pair of ejectors on the card are properly latched/locked
to the faceplate and the captive screws are tightened enough to secure the card on
the chassis.
Eject the card
Perform the following steps to eject a card with ejectors from the chassis:
ejected.
482

General procedures
2. Disconnect all fibers/cables connected to ports on the card.

3. Loosen the captive screws located on both ends of the face plate of the card using
Phillips (PH1) screwdriver. The screws should be loose enough to allow the removal
of card.
Figure 389: Loosening captive screws on the card
4. Hold the latch handles provided at both ends on the front panel of the card and pull
the card gently to disengage it from the backplane. Wait till the status LED blinks in
"Amber" color before pulling out the card from chassis.
5. Slide out the card along the guided ways till it comes out of the slot, while support-
ing it with your other hand.
483

Figure 390: Sliding the card out of the chassis
20.7 Insert and eject the adapter card

This section details the insertion and ejection procedures for the adapter card on a
TJ1600 node.
• Optical adapter card HCPADP01 is used to split a slot in TJ1600 chassis to 2/3rd +
1/3rd slots.
• Optical adapter card HCPADP02 is used to split a slot in TJ1600 chassis to 1/2 + 1/
2 slots.
The divided slots have backplane support to install the following cards:
2/3rd Slot
• FPU01 with FPUADP01 adapter card
• MDU-8-D
1/3rd Slot
• FPU01
1/2 Slot
• OADM1
484

General procedures
• OADM4
• ILU
• OPM4
• VOA
• FPU02
RISK OF EYE INJURY: Avoid direct exposure to laser beam or

fiber as the invisible light can blind the person. Keep all unused optical connectors
capped.
Prerequisites
Before inserting or ejecting the adapter card, ensure that:
• The adapter card is installed first, followed by the active or passive card which are
to be inserted in adapter card.
• The active or passive card which are inserted in adapter card is removed first,
followed by the adapter card (if required).
• If the chassis installed on a rack is at a height more than the eye level of the
Note: The procedure is explained for inserting and ejecting HCPADP01 adapter card.
Follow the same procedure for inserting and ejecting HCPADP02 adapter card.
Insert the adapter card
Perform the following steps to insert the adapter card into the chassis:
2. Hold the adapter card (HCPADP01) to be installed with proper support and slide in
the card along the guide ways provided on the chassis to the point it easily goes
into the chassis. While sliding, position of the card should be horizontal as shown in
the following figure:
485

Figure 391: Installing adapter card into the chassis
3. Hold the latch handles provided on the front panel of the card and gently push the
card into the chassis to engage it to the backplane connector.
sides of the front panel of the card using Phillips screwdriver.
5. After installing the adapter card, insert the required cards into the slots of adapter
card. Follow the procedure for inserting a card as explained in topic Cards with
latch handles.
Insert FPUADP01 into HCPADP01 adapter card
FPUADP01 adapter card is used to house a FPU01 card into 2/3rd slot of HCPADP01
adapter card.
Perform the following steps to insert FPUADP01 adapter card into HCPADP01 card:
2. Follow the procedure explained in previous topic "Insert the adapter card" for
inserting the HCPADP01 card into the desired slot on TJ1600 chassis.
3. Hold the FPUADP01 adapter card to be installed with proper support and slide in
the card along the guide ways provided on 2/3rd slot of HCPADP01 card to the
point it easily goes into the chassis. While sliding, position of the card should be
horizontal, as shown in the following figure:
486

General procedures
Figure 392: Sliding FPUADP01 adapter card into HCPADP01
4. Secure the adapter card to the chassis by tightening the captive screws located on
both sides of the face plate of the card using Phillips (PH1) screwdriver.
5. Now insert the FPU01 card into the slots of FPUADP01 adapter card. Follow the pro-
cedure for inserting a card as explained in the topic Cards with latch handles.
Eject the adapter card
Perform the following steps to eject the adapter card from the chassis:
removed.
2. Disconnect the cable connectors from the interfaces (if present) on the desired
cards present in adapter card.
3. Remove the cards inserted in HCPADP01 adapter card. Follow the procedure for
ejecting a card as explained in topic Cards with latch handles.
4. To remove HCPADP01 adapter card from the chassis, loosen the two captive screws
located on both sides of the card. The screws should be loose enough to allow the
removal of card.
5. Hold the latch handles on front panel of HCPADP01 adapter card and gently pull out
the card to disengage it from the backplane connector.
6. Slide out the adapter card along the guide ways till it comes out of the slot, while
supporting it with your other hand.
487

Figure 393: Sliding out the adapter card from the chassis
20.8 Insert and eject pluggable modules

Before replacing SFP/SFP+/XFP, make sure that the following:
• Replacement transceiver, or a transceiver slot plug

• Antistatic mat
• Rubber safety cap for the transceiver
LASER RADIATION EXPOSURE RISK: Do not look directly

into a fiber-optic transceiver or into the end of a fiber-optic cable. Fiber-optic
transceivers contain laser light sources that can damage your eyes.
488

General procedures
CAUTION: Avoid bending fiber-optic cable beyond its minimum bend

radius. An arc smaller than a few inches in diameter can damage the cable and
cause problems that are difficult to diagnose.
CAUTION: Enure that you open the ejector handle completely (you
hear click sound) to prevent transceiver damage.
20.8.1 Insert and eject SFP/SFP+/XFP modules

Follow the procedure for inserting and ejecting SFP/SFP+/XFP modules.
Insert SFP/SFP+/XFP modules
Determine the type of latch the SFP transceiver module consists before following the
insertion and removal procedures. The SFP transceiver modules can have three types of
latching devices to secure an SFP transceiver module in a port socket.
SFP transceiver module with a Mylar tab latch.
Figure 394: SFP transceiver module with a Mylar tab latch
SFP transceiver module with an actuator button latch.
489

Figure 395: SFP transceiver module with an actuator button latch
SFP/SFP+/XFP transceiver module that has a bail clasp latch.

Figure 396: SFP/SFP+/XFP transceiver module having a bail clasp latch
Perform the following steps when inserting transceiver module:

1. Attach an ESD wrist strap to your bare wrist and connect the wrist strap to one of
the ESD points on the chassis.
2. Remove the transceiver module from its protective packaging.
3. Verify the label on the module to make sure that the appropriate module to be used
in the network port.
4. Place the transceiver module in front of the network port opening.
5. Insert the transceiver in to the port and push gently inwards. For a bail clasp SFP,
SFP+, or XFP-Latch (flip upwards) the bail clasp before inserting the SFP, SFP+, or
XFP into the slot and then slide it into the slot.
490

General procedures
Figure 397: Inserting the transceiver in to the port
Note: For modules with an actuator latch, press firmly on both the transceiver
faceplate and the actuator button to ensure that the module is properly latched in
the socket.
6. A click sound indicates that the module is locked into the port.
7. Verify that the module is latched properly in the socket. Try to remove it without
releasing the latch. If the module cannot be removed, it is inserted and positioned
properly. If the module can be removed, reinsert it and press harder with your
thumb.
8. Remove the dust plugs from the module optical bores.
9. Immediately attach the network interface cable LC connectors to the transceiver
module.
Figure 398: Inserting LC connector cable into the transceiver module
Eject SFP/SFP+/XFP modules

1. Label the cables connected to the transceiver module so that you can reconnect
them correctly later.
2. Remove the cable connector plugged into the transceiver module.
491

3. Place a rubber safety cap over the transceiver.

4. Carefully drape the disconnected cable over the bobbins in the cable management
system less than the FPC card cage to prevent the cable from developing stress
points.
5. Remove the transceiver module from the socket.
— If the transceiver module has a Mylar tab latch, pull the tab gently in a slightly
downward direction until the transceiver disengages from the socket connector, and
then pull the transceiver module straight out. Do not twist or pull the Mylar tab because
you can detach it from the transceiver module.
Figure 399: Ejecting pluggable module with Mylar tab
— If the transceiver module has an actuator button latch, gently press the actuator button
on the front of the transceiver module until it clicks and the latch mechanism releases
the transceiver module from the socket connector. Grasp the actuator button between
your thumb and index finger, and carefully pull the transceiver approximately 0.5 inch
(1.3 cm) out of the PIC or cFPC straight from the module slot.
» For the 10-port Gigabit Ethernet PIC, use needle-nose pliers or flat-blade screwdriver
or other long narrow instrument to pull the ejector handle out from the SFP.
Figure 400: Ejecting pluggable module with actuator button
— If the SFP transceiver module has a bail clasp latch, pull the latch out and down to
remove the transceiver module from the socket connector.
Note: If the bail clasp latch is obstructed and you cannot use your index finger
to open it, use a small flat-blade screwdriver or other long narrow instrument
to open the bail clasp latch. Grasp the SFP transceiver module between your
thumb and index finger, and carefully remove it from the socket.
492

General procedures
Figure 401: Ejecting SFP/SFP+/XFP transceiver module having a bail clasp latch
6. Place the removed transceiver on an antistatic mat or in an electrostatic bag.
20.8.2 Insert and eject CFP modules

Perform the following procedures for inserting and ejecting CFP modules:
Insert CFP module
1. Attach an ESD wrist strap to your bare wrist and connect the wrist strap to one of
the ESD points on the chassis.
2. Remove the transceiver module from its protective packaging.
3. Verify the label on the module to make sure that the appropriate module to be used
in the network port.
4. Place the transceiver module in front of the network port opening.
5. Align the CFP device into the transceiver port socket of your networking module,
and slide it in until the CFP transceiver EMI gasket flange makes contact with the
module faceplate.
6. Press firmly on the front of the CFP transceiver with your thumb to fully seat it in
the transceiver socket.
7. Gently tighten the two captive screws on the transceiver to secure the CFP trans-
ceiver in the socket.
493

Figure 402: Tighten the captive screw on CFP
8. Reinsert the dust plug into the CFP transceiver's optical bore until you are ready to
attach the network interface cable.
9. When you are ready to attach the network cable interface, remove the dust plugs
and inspect and clean fiber connector end faces, and then immediately attach the
network interface cable connectors into the CFP transceiver optical bores.
Figure 403: Inserting SC connector cable into the CFP transceiver module
Eject CFP module

1. Label the cables connected to the transceiver module so that you can reconnect
them correctly later.
2. Remove the cable connector plugged into the transceiver module. Immediately
reinsert the dust plugs in the CFP transceiver optical bores.
3. Loosen the two captive screws that secure the CFP to the networking module.
494

General procedures
Figure 404: Loosening the captive screws on CFP
4. Slide the CFP transceiver out of the module socket. Immediately place the CFP
transceiver in antistatic protective packaging.
Figure 405: Ejecting CFP module
20.9 Extension power cord gauge calculation

This section provides guidelines to size the power cable conductor for extending the
cable length beyond the standard 3m cable supplied with nodes.
As a standard installation kit Tejas nodes are supplied with 3m power cord which is
sufficient to wire within the 42U rack. In some installation cases, as part of customer
requirement, this cable length need to be increased, may be to power multiple NE's and
other collocated instruments. Excess cable length causes voltage drop on the cable
which may interrupt the systems operation, especially when the source voltage drops
495

less than 40V. The online tool explained in the following helps to calculate the voltage
drop on the cable and size the cable according to the requirement.
Calculation
To calculate the gauge of power cable, access the following link:
1. http://www.calculator.net/voltage-drop-
calculator.html?material=aluminum&wiresize=1.296&voltage=230&phase=ac3&no
ofconductor=1&distance=200&distanceunit=meters&amperes=20&x=64&y=12
2. The following fields are displayed in the link. Enter the desired values by referring
to the table Voltage drop calculator parameters.
Figure 406: Voltage drop calculator parameters
3. Click Calculate. The result appears.

4. The Voltage drop shall be less than 0.5V. In case the voltage drop is more than
0.5V, change the attribute Wire size and calculate again until the voltage drop falls
less than 0.5V. The Voltage at the end in the result shall be greater than 39.5V.
5. To convert American Wire Gauge (AWG) to mm2, in the same earlier mentioned
website has typical AWG wire sizes are provided. Use the table to arrive at suitable
wire size. Since the table is made for AWG Indian equivalent mm2 wires may not
be available off the shelf. In such case choose the next higher wire size available
for usage.
496

General procedures
Table 70: Voltage drop calculator parameters
Parameters Description Action to be taken
Wire material Select the type of wire Select Copper

material (Aluminum/Copper/
Silver/Gold).
Wire size Choose the wire gauge. Choose the wire gauge until the
Voltage drop result fall less than
0.5V.
Voltage Enter the supply voltage. Enter 40V.

40V is the lowest operating voltage
supported by nodes.
Phase Select the DC, AC single Select DC

phase, AC 3-phase.
Number of Select number of parallel Select single set of conductors

conductors conductors.
Distance Enter the distance and select Select unit as meters and enter the
the unit. length of the cable from power
source to the rack/equipment
power inlet.
This calculator takes care of round
trip wire length (return cable).
Enter only one way distance.
Load current Enter the current It is recommended that the user
requirement in Amps. enters the amperes considering the
total number of chassis that can be
placed in the rack even though the
present requirement does not
demand for it.
Table 71: Typical AWG wire sizes
AWG Area
(mm2)
0000 (4/0) 107
000 (3/0) 85
00 (2/0) 67.4
0 (1/0) 53.5
1 42.4
497

Table 71: Typical AWG wire sizes
AWG Area
(mm2)
2 33.6
3 26.7
4 21.2
5 16.8
6 13.3
7 10.5
8 8.37
9 6.63
10 5.26
11 4.17
12 3.31
13 2.62
14 2.08
15 1.65
16 1.31
20.10 Handle microSD disk

While handling a microSD disk, sweat and skin oils may form a film on the contact
terminals of the microSD disk. This may lead to poor connection when installed in socket
which can result in corruption of microSD disk. To avoid such contamination, take the
following precautionary measures for the instances given in the following:
• In-production
— Use clean hand gloves when handling microSD disk.
— Do not touch the gold plated terminal with bare hands.
498

General procedures
Figure 407: Gold plated terminal of microSD disk
— Clean disk contacts with isopropyl alcohol before final installation into the system.
• In-field
— Before switching ON the power of the system, take out the microSD disk from socket
(connector used is push-push type) by holding edges of microSD disk.
Figure 408: Technique for proper holding of disk
— Wipe the gold plated terminal with a lint-free, clean cloth soaked in isopropyl alcohol.
Ensure not to touch the gold plated terminal with bare hands while cleaning.
— After wiping and drying the microSD disk, place the disk back into the socket and then
plug the card into system.
Recommended microSD disk size
499

Following table lists the recommended microSD disk size to be used in the cards with
processor:
Table 72: MicroSD disk size
Cards Size
HCPSLine12 2GB
OSMC01 4GB
OAMC 4GB
CEF-5 2GB
HCPSLine24 2GB
HCPSLine25 2GB
HCPSLine26 2GB
HCPSLine27 2GB
XCC03 4GB
XCC04 4GB
Note: The disk partition varies for different RHEL versions. Hence it is recommended
that the disk programming operation is performed by field personnel only.
500

21 Guidelines to route the cables
This chapter describes the procedures and the guidelines to route cables securely
without degrading the performance, and avoid insecure and unsafe connections.
These guidelines must be followed in order to avoid any malfunction that happens when
there is a close contact between the boxes, cards, data, and power cables.
These guidelines help you to avoid blockages to card population, access to various
components in the front or back panel, opening or closing components, and adding or
removing components.
21.1 Separate the power and data cables

Cables in close proximity to each other, especially those oriented in parallel or in loops,
can create EMI through induction. The EMI can result in erratic or error-prone data
transfers. To minimize the effects of the EMI, power cables must be segregated from
data cables as much as possible:
• Route the signal cables on either side of the rack depending on the orientation of
cable routing.
• Power cables must be routed separately as a bunch, avoid grouping with signal
cables.
• Arrange and secure excess power and data cabling separately.
21.2 Retain the excess cable

Installing a number of components in a rack typically results in the use of some cables
that are longer than necessary. This is especially true when similar or redundant
components with the same cable types are installed at various levels in a rack. The
excess cable lengths are often hurriedly bundled and tied, resulting in problems
associated with EMI or in damaged cables.
The following are some preferred methods of handling excess cables:
• Run and attach excess cables for easy, safe maintenance activities and proper
operations.
• Ensure that secured cables are not pinched, damaged, or kinked. For more details,
see the Cable bend-radius restrictions.
501

21.3 Protect the cables

Cables must be protected at points where they might rub or come in contact with sharp
edges or heated areas. Extra care must be taken for power cables as damaged
conductors cause downtime and because exposed conductors are a safety hazard.
The following practices are recommended to protect cables:
• Avoid routing the cables tightly over sharp edges of railing or panels.
• Avoid pinching of cables between components or mounting/sliding rails.
• Protect the cables if they are likely to get pinched or damaged.
21.4 Route the fiber optic cables

Fiber optic cables are lighter than copper cables. Fiber optic cables are relatively delicate
and must be handled carefully during installation. These cables requires extra
protection. Damaged fiber optic cables pose no safety hazards but can result in
degraded or interrupted performance. The following guidelines are recommended for
installing fiber optic cables:
• Use only velcro ties to reduce the chance of damaging cable from over-cinching or
accidental cutting.
• Do not allow other cables or components to exert tension on fiber optic cables,
which is easily crushed or damaged.
• Avoid routing fiber optic cable around chassis and cabinet corners. If this is
unavoidable, protect the cable.
21.5 Route the network cables

Network interconnects involves a large amount of cabling due to the component or data
path redundancy required to meet high availability goals. Network devices also require
high serviceability, so cabling must be arranged to allow easy access to individual
circuits.
The following guidelines are recommended for routing data cables:
• For components that must be movable while powered on, make sure that a full
range of motion is possible without cable interference or disconnection.
• When securing cables inside the rack, dress the bundle in a way that avoids
interference with installed components, rack side panels, or rails.
• Do not block access to field-replaceable components.
502

Guidelines to route the cables
21.6 Facilitate filter removal

To avoid filter removal issue during routing, we recommend the following guidelines:
• Route the cable to fan side which requires less maintenance.
• Route the cable within the card space by the help of cable router.
• Route a cable with slack.
• Use velcro tape to bundle the cables.

The following figure shows an example in one of the Tejas equipment for filter removal
with the help of cable slack.
Figure 409: Filter removal with the help of cable slack
21.7 Avoid thermal issues while routing cables

The rack-mountable products that use forced air-cooling draw cool air from the left of
the switch and push out the warm air out through the right side. If this air flow is
restricted in any way, component temperature rises, resulting in unscheduled system
downtime due to thermal shutdown or damage.
For safe and reliable operation, ventilation slots and blowers/fans of products must not
be obstructed by any components, including cables. Therefore, for proper cooling of
rack-mounted components, ensure that cabling does not impede the airflow to or from
the rack-mountable systems.
503

21.8 Cable bend-radius restrictions

Routing cables typically requires looping excess cable or bending cable around switch
components. The bend radius is defined as the minimum radius to which a cable may
safely be bent without damaging the cable or affecting its performance.
Figure 410: Cable bend-radius restrictions
The following practices are recommended to avoid the consequences of a too short or
too tight bend radius:
• Avoid tight bend radii. Never bend cables tight enough to cause a crease in the
sheathing.
• With no exceptions, fiber cables must not violate their minimum bend radius.
• Avoid excessive bends in cable, and run the cable as large a bend as space allows.
Excessive bending of cables can create one or more of the following problems:
• For power cables, its conductors and shields are stressed, which leads to
degradation of the cable and conductor insulation.
• For copper data cables, it results in stressed terminators, stress on center

conductors or disturbed twists on conductors that increase sensitivity to noise.
• For fiber optic cables, it leads to micro-bending of fibers that results in degradation
of light transmission or breaking of fibers, which in turn results in loss of signal.
504

22 Connector pin assignment
This appendix details connector pin details used for installing the node.
22.1 PFU08 power connector

Table 73: PFU08 power connector
Diagram Pin Signals
1 RET
2 GND
3 -48 V
22.2 HCPPFU07 power connector

Table 74: HCPPFU07 power connector
Diagram Pin Signals
1 RET
2 GND
3 -48 V
22.3 HCPPFU02 power connector

Table 75: HCPPFU02 power connector
Diagram Pin Signals
1 RET
2 GND
3 -48 V
505

22.4 PFU4 power connector

Table 76: PFU4 power connector
Diagram Pin Signals
1 +ve
2 GND
3 -ve
22.5 Alarm input connector

Table 77: Alarm input connector
Diagram Pin Description

RJ-45
1 ALARMIN1
2 ALARMIN2
3 ALARMIN3
4 ALARMIN4
5 ALARMIN5
6 ALARMIN6
7 ALARMIN7
8 GND
506

Connector pin assignment
22.6 Alarm output connector

Table 78: Alarm output connector

RJ-45
1 ALARMOUT4_COM
2 ALARMOUT4
3 ALARMOUT3_COM
4 ALARMOUT3
5 ALARMOUT2_COM
6 ALARMOUT2
7 ALARMOUT1_COM
8 ALARMOUT1
22.7 LNMS/NMS1/NMS2 connector

Table 79: LNMS connector

1 TXP
2 TXN
3 RXP
4 -
5 -
6 RXN
7 -
8 -
507

22.8 ESI connector

Table 80: ESI connector
RJ-45
1 CLKIN+/DATAIN+
2 CLKIN-/DATAIN-
3 CLKIN+/DATAIN+
4 CLKOUT-/DATAOUT-
5 CLKOUT+/DATAOUT+
6 CLKIN+/DATAIN+
7 CLKOUT+/DATAOUT+
8 CLKOUT-/DATAOUT-
22.9 NMS connector

Table 81: NMS connector

RJ-45
1 TX+_D1
2 TX-_D1
3 RX+_D2
4 BI+_D3
5 BI-_D3
6 RX-_D2
7 BI+_D4
8 BI-_D4
508

Connector pin assignment
22.10 LCT connector

Table 82: LCT connector
Diagram Pin Signal
1 CD
2 RD
3 TD
4 DTR
5 GND
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9 RI
22.11 LAN/MGN connector

Table 83: LAN/MGN connector

RJ-45
1 TX_P
2 TX_N
3 RX_P
4 Unused
5 RX_N
6 Unused
7 Unused
8 Unused
509

22.12 M1/F1 connector

Table 84: M1/F1 connector
1 DSR
2 CD
3 DTR
4 GND
5 RD
6 TD
7 CTS
8 RTS
22.13 Craft connector

Table 85: Craft connector
1 DSR
2 CD
3 DTR
4 GND
5 RD
6 TD
7 CTS
8 RTS
510

23 Cable color codes
This section lists the color coding scheme used for the various cables used in the
system.
23.1 PFU08 power cable

Table 86: PFU08 power cable
Pin Color code

1 Red
2 Green
3 Amber
23.2 HCPPFU07 power cable

Table 87: HCPPFU07 power cable
Pin Color code

1 Red
2 Green
3 Amber
23.3 HCPPFU02 power cable

Table 88: HCPPFU02 power cable
Pin Color code

1 Red
2 Green/Green-Yellow
3 Black
23.4 PFU4 power cable

Table 89: PFU4 power cable
Pin Color code

1 Red/Blue
2 Green/Yellow
3 Black
511

23.5 Alarm-in cable

Table 90: Alarm-in cable
Pin Color code Signal Pair

RJ-45
1 White/Orange ALARMIN_1 P1
2 Orange ALARMIN_2
3 White/Green ALARMIN_3 P2
4 Green ALARMIN_4
5 White/Blue ALARMIN_5 P3
6 Blue ALARMIN_6
7 White/Brown ALARMIN_7 P4
8 Brown GND
23.6 Alarm-out cable

Table 91: Alarm-out cable
RJ-45
1 White/Orange ALARMOUT4_COM P1
2 Orange ALARMOUT4
3 White/Green ALARMOUT3_COM P2
4 Green ALARMOUT3
5 White/Blue ALARMOUT2_COM P3
6 Blue ALARMOUT2
7 White/Brown ALARMOUT1_COM P4
8 Brown ALARMOUT
23.7 ESI cable

Table 92: ESI cable

RJ-45
1 White/Orange CLKINP/DATAINP P1
2 Orange CLKINN/DATAINN
3 White/Green CLKINP/DATAINP P2
4 Green CLKINN/DATAINN
512

Cable color codes
Table 92: ESI cable

5 White/Blue CLKOUTP/DATAOUTP P3
6 Blue CLKOUTN/DATAOUTN
7 White/Brown CLKOUTP/DATAOUTP P4
8 Brown CLKOUTN/DATAOUTN
23.8 M1/F1 cable

Table 93: M1/F1 cable
Pin Color code Signal Pin

RJ-45 DB9
1 Black DSR 6
2 White CD 1
3 Red DTR 4
4 Green TD 5
5 Brown RD 2
6 Blue GND 3
7 Orange CTS 8
8 Yellow RTS 7
23.9 LAN/MGN cable

Table 94: LAN/MGN cable
Pins on end-A Color code Pair Pins on end-B

1 Blue P1 NC
2 White P1 3
3 Orange P2 2
4 White P2 NC
5 NC 5
6 NC NC
7 NC NC
8 NC NC
513

23.10 LCT cable

Table 95: LCT cable
Pin Color code Pin
1+6 Black 4
2 White 3
3 Red 2
4 Green 1+6
5 Brown 5
7 Orange 8
8 Yellow 7
9 Blue 9
23.11 Craft cable

Table 96: Craft cable
Pins on RJ45 plug Color code of cable conductors Pins on 9 D-sub male
1 Black NC
2 Brown 1
3 Red 4
4 Orange 3
5 Yellow 2
6 Green 5
7 Blue 8
8 White 7
NOTE: The braid shield of the cable must be connected to the outer shield of
RJ45 plug and captive screws/body of DB9 connector.
23.12 LNMS/NMS1/NMS2 cable

Table 97: LNMS/NMS1/NMS2 cable
End-A pin (RJ- Color Pair End-B pin (RJ-45)

45)
1 Blue P1 1
2 White 2
3 Orange P2 3
4 White 4
514

Cable color codes
Table 97: LNMS/NMS1/NMS2 cable
End-A pin (RJ- Color Pair End-B pin (RJ-45)

45)
5 NC 5
6 NC 6
7 NC 7
8 NC 8
Shield Drain wire Shield
515

516

24 Graphical presentation of cards -
dimensions
This section provides graphical presentation of all TJ1600C line cards along with
dimensions. To know more about physical characteristics of card with weight and
dimensions, refer to TJ1600 Product Family Hardware Description Guide.
Note: All dimensions mentioned in the images are in mm.
HCPSLine21
The following graphical presentation is of line card HCPSLine21:

Figure 411: Physical dimension of HCPSLine21
517

HCPSLine22

518

Graphical presentation of cards - dimensions
HCPSLine24

519

HCPSLine25

520

HCPSLine26

521

HCPSLine27

522

HCPSLine28

523

HCPSLine29

524

HCPSLine31
525

HCPSLine32
526

HCPSLine33
527

HCPSLine34
528

25 Appendix
25.1 Regulatory standards compliance
The list of technical standards provided in this chapter is not exhaustive. The standards
listed are generally regarded as the primary applicable electromagnetic compatibility
(EMC) and safety standards. The conformity status on additional national and
international standards not listed in this section can be provided upon request.
Table 98: Regulatory standard compliance
Specification Standard compliance
EMI / EMC FCC Part-15, Subpart B, Class-A
ICES-003, Class-A
EN 300386
EN 55032 Class A / CISPR 32 Class A
EN 55035 / CISPR35 (EN61000-4-2, EN61000-4-3, EN61000-4-4, EN
610004-5, EN61000-4-6, EN 61000-4-8)
EN 55032 Class A / CISPR 32 Class A
EN61000-3-2, EN61000-3-3 and EN61000-4-11 (Applicable to AC

power supply models only)
EN61000-4-29 (Applicable to DC power supply models only)
Safety Certified for CB - Scheme
IEC 62368-1 / EN 62368-1
UL 62368-1
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 62368-1
LASER safety IEC 60825-1 / EN 60825-1
IEC 60825-2 / EN 60825-2
21 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR)1040
529

Table 98: Regulatory standard compliance
Specification Standard compliance
Environment ETSI EN 300 019-1-1, Class 1.2 Storage
ETSI EN 300 019-1-2, Class 2.3 Transportation
ETSI EN 300 019-1-3, Class 3.2 Operating stationary use
ETSI EN 300 019-1-3 V2.1.2 and ETSI EN 300 019-2-3 V2.1.2 for
Environmental Class 3.1
QM333 – Functional for Environmental testing of Electronic

equipments for Transmission and switching use.
RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU

compliant
RoHS3 Directive 2015/863/EU
compliant
530

I&c TJ1600

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

I&c TJ1600

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

I&c TJ1600

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TJ1600 Product Family

Installation and Commissioning Guide

Issue Date: 11-Mar-2024

Version Document ID and Updates

©Tejas Networks Ltd.

• TJ1600-2 (also referred to as TJ1600-Type-2SR)

• TJ1600-6 (also referred to as TJ1600-Type-6SR)

• TJ1600-11 (also referred to as TJ1600 Type-11SR)

1.1 Content organization

Installation, This chapter gives an overview of the installation,

Install TJ1600 node This chapter describes procedures to be followed when

Connect ports on This chapter describes the port connections on HCPOAM03

©Tejas Networks Ltd.

General configuration This appendix describes the general procedures for

General procedures This appendix describes the procedures to be followed when

©Tejas Networks Ltd.

1.2 Additional resources

Document Name Description

1.3 Target Audience

©Tejas Networks Ltd.

2.1 Safety recommendations

2.1.1 General safety guidelines

• Wear safety earmuffs or earphones if you are working in noisy conditions.

• Wear safety helmet when working at height.

2.1.2 Maintain safety with electricity

• Do not work alone if potentially hazardous conditions exist.

©Tejas Networks Ltd.

2.1.3 Prevent electrostatic discharge damage

• Always follow ESD-prevention when removing and replacing components.

• Ensure that the chassis is electrically connected to earth ground.

2.2 General site requirements

2.2.1 Site environment

2.2.2 Preventive site configuration

• Damage from static discharge can cause immediate or intermittent equipment

©Tejas Networks Ltd.

CAUTION: Proper hydraulic/pneumatic material handling equipment

2.2.3 Thermal considerations

©Tejas Networks Ltd.

2.2.4 Guidelines for populating pluggable in chassis

• Follow the recommended order for populating pluggable in the chassis.

Recommended order of pluggable installation

©Tejas Networks Ltd.

Figure 2: Population rule- Case 1

©Tejas Networks Ltd.

Figure 4: Population rule- Case 3

2.2.5 Equipment racks configuration

• The chassis cannot be installed on sliders.

• Adequate ventilation is available for equipment at the bottom of the rack. In an

2.2.6 Power supply considerations

©Tejas Networks Ltd.

2.3 Power filter unit (PFU)

• Read the power procedures before you perform any function.

• Use the appropriate insulated tools to perform any tasks.

• This product requires short-circuit (over current/circuit breaker) protection to be

• PFU is damaged or non-functional.

• Feeder low voltage or power failure.

RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK: The battery feeds can be at a high

©Tejas Networks Ltd.

RISK OF PERSONAL INJURY, ENERGY HAZARD: The battery feeds